Panasonic DMR EH67 User Manual

Operating Instructions  
DVD Recorder  
Instructions/notes regarding SD Cards and  
SD Drive are applicable to the DMR-EH67  
model only.  
Model No. DMR-EH57  
DMR-EH67  
Region number supported by  
this unit  
Region numbers are allocated to DVD  
Recorders and DVD-Video according to  
where they are sold.  
For Asia  
The region number of this unit is “3”.  
The unit will play DVD-Video marked with  
labels containing “3” or “ALL”.  
Example:  
The illustrations in these Operating Instructions show images of the silver model of  
DMR-EH57 for Australia and N.Z.  
2
3
3
ALL  
4
For Australia and N.Z.  
The region number of this unit is “4”.  
The unit will play DVD-Video marked with  
labels containing “4” or “ALL”.  
Example:  
2
3
4
ALL  
4
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
For Middle East  
The region number of this unit is “2”.  
The unit will play DVD-Video marked with  
labels containing “2” or “ALL”.  
Example:  
2
3
2
ALL  
5
Dear customer  
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum  
performance and safety, please read these  
instructions carefully.  
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this  
product, please read the instructions completely.  
Please keep this manual for future reference.  
RQT8906-L  
GC GCS GN  
Table of contents  
Getting started  
Editing  
HDD, disc and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Disc and card handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Main unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Editing titles/chapters and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Title operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Creating playlists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Editing and playing playlists/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Playlist operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Editing still pictures [EH67] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Album and picture operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia  
Delete Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Deleting titles or pictures during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Interface) terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control TM” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect  
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
STEP 3 Set up to match your television  
Copying  
Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Copying SD Video from an SD Card [EH67]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
To enjoy progressive video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Recording  
Copying still pictures [EH67] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Copying using the copying list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Copying all the still pictures on a card—Copy All Pictures . . . . . 53  
Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Recording television programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Disc Insertion/Ejection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
To specify a time to stop recording—One Touch Recording . . . 24  
Recording settings for High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Convenient functions  
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Using G-CODE system to make timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . 28  
To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Relief Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
HDD, disc and card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Deleting all the contents of a disc or card—Format . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Selecting the background style—Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first  
—Auto-Play Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalise . . . . 57  
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Summary of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
TV System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Playing back  
Playing recorded video contents/  
Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Operations during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and  
still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Regarding DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG). . . . 33  
Selecting file type to play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Playing DivX discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Playing MP3 discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Reference  
Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back cover  
About descriptions in these operating instructions  
These operating instructions are applicable to models  
DMR-EH57 and DMR-EH67. Unless otherwise indicated,  
illustrations in these operating instructions are of DMR-EH57  
for Australia and N.Z.  
[EH57] : indicates features applicable to DMR-EH57 only.  
[EH67] : indicates features applicable to DMR-EH67 only.  
Instructions/notes regarding SD Cards and SD Drive are  
applicable to the DMR-EH67 model only.  
Pages to be referred to are indicated as “{{”.  
RQT8906  
3
HDD, disc and card information  
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play  
Hard disk drive (HDD)  
[EH57] 160 GB  
DVD-RAM  
4.7 GB/9.4 GB, 12 cm  
Disc type  
[EH67] 250 GB  
2.8 GB, 8 cm  
Logo  
Indicated in these  
instructions by  
[HDD]  
[RAM]  
DVD Video Recording format  
This is a recording format which allows you to record and edit television broadcasts and so on.  
You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc.  
Recording format  
The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.  
Data that can be recorded  
and played  
Video  
Still pictures ([EH67])  
Video  
Still pictures ([EH67])  
Re-writable  
Play on other players§2  
Only on DVD-RAM compatible players.  
Compatible with high  
speed recording§3  
Up to 5X recording speed discs.  
What you can do on this unit (: Can do, –: Cannot do)  
Recording broadcasts that  
allow one copy  
[CPRM (77) compatible discs only.]  
Recording both M 1 and  
M 2 for bilingual  
broadcasts§4  
Recording 16:9 aspect  
picture§4  
Creating and editing  
playlists  
DVD-R DL§1  
(dual layer on single side)  
You cannot directly record to a  
DVD-R DL disc on this unit (8)  
DVD-R§1  
4.7 GB, 12 cm  
1.4 GB, 8 cm  
DVD-RW  
4.7 GB, 12 cm  
1.4 GB, 8 cm  
Disc type  
Logo  
[-R] before finalisation  
[-R]DL] before finalisation  
[-RW‹V›] before finalisation  
Indicated in these  
instructions by  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
DVD-Video format  
This recording format is the same as commercially available DVD-Video.  
Recording format  
The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.  
Data that can be recorded  
and played  
Video  
Video  
Video  
Re-writable  
Only on DVD-R DL compatible  
players after finalising the disc  
(57, 77).  
Only after finalising the disc  
Play on other players§2  
Only after finalising the disc (57, 77).  
(57, 77).  
Compatible with high  
speed recording§3  
Up to 16X recording speed discs.  
Up to 8X recording speed discs.  
Up to 6X recording speed discs.  
What you can do on this unit (: Can do, –: Cannot do)  
Recording broadcasts that  
allow one copy  
Recording both M 1 and  
[Only one is recorded.(62, Bilingual  
[Only one is recorded.(62,  
Bilingual Audio Selection)]  
[Only one is recorded.(62,  
Bilingual Audio Selection)]  
M 2 for bilingual  
Audio Selection)]  
broadcasts§4  
Recording 16:9 aspect  
picture§4  
Creating and editing  
playlists  
RQT8906  
(continued on the next page)  
4
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play  
(continued)  
+R DL§1  
(double layer on single side)  
You cannot directly record to a  
+R DL disc on this unit (8)  
+R§1 §5  
4.7 GB, 12 cm  
Disc type  
Logo  
+RW  
[+R] before finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
[+R]DL] before finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
Indicated in these  
instructions by  
[+RW]  
+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format  
This is a format for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs.  
You can playback such discs recorded in this format in a similar way as contents recorded in the DVD-Video  
format.  
Recording format  
The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.  
After finalising the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the disc on DVD players and other equipment.  
Data that can be recorded  
and played  
Video  
Video  
Video  
Re-writable  
Play on other players§2  
Only on +R DL compatible players  
after finalising the disc (57, 77).  
Only after finalising the disc (57, 77).  
Only on +RW compatible players.  
Compatible with high  
speed recording§3  
Up to 16X recording speed discs.  
Up to 8X recording speed discs.  
Up to 4X recording speed discs.§6  
What you can do on this unit (: Can do, –: Cannot do)  
Recording broadcasts that  
allow one copy  
Recording both M 1 and  
[Only one is recorded.(62,  
M 2 for bilingual  
[Only one is recorded.(62,  
Bilingual Audio Selection)]  
[Only one is recorded.(62,  
Bilingual Audio Selection)]  
Bilingual Audio Selection)]  
broadcasts§4  
Recording 16:9 aspect  
picture§4  
(The picture is recorded in 4:3  
(The picture is recorded in 4:3  
(The picture is recorded in 4:3  
aspect.)  
aspect.)  
aspect.)  
Creating and editing playlists  
§1  
The amount of the recordable disc space doesn’t increase even if the programme is deleted when you use discs that can only be used for  
recording once.  
[RAM] Can be played on Panasonic DVD Recorders and DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.  
If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.  
The high speed recording discs listed here are compatible with this unit. However, this is not the copy speed.  
For further information (8, Important notes for recording)  
§2  
§3  
§4  
[Note]  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, the restrictions on secondary audio recording are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this setting  
“Off” if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme (The default setting is “On”. 61).  
+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However, discs that are  
finalised are compatible and can be played.  
§5  
§6  
You can play 8X recording speed discs recorded on another equipment.  
We recommend using Panasonic discs and cards. We also recommend using DVD-RAM discs with cartridges to protect them from scratches  
and dirt.  
You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.  
You cannot record programmes that allow “One time only recording” to CPRM compatible DVD-R and DVD-RW on this unit.  
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded  
onto the HDD.)  
Finalise  
A process that makes play of a recorded disc possible on equipment that can play such media. After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and  
you can no longer record or edit. (57)  
Formatting  
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment. (56)  
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.  
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.  
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.  
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL  
(Double Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable  
layers on one side. If there is not enough space on the  
first layer to record a programme, the remainder is  
recorded on the second layer. When playing a title  
When switching layers:  
Video and audio may momentarily cut  
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically  
switches between layers and plays the title in the same  
way as a normal programme. However, video and  
audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is  
switching layers.  
Second recordable layer  
The available  
space  
(Inner  
section of the  
disc)  
(Outersection  
of the disc)  
First recordable layer  
DVD-R DL  
+R DL  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Playback direction  
RQT8906  
5
Recording modes and approximate recording times (23)  
HDD, disc and card information  
Play-only discs (12 cm/8 cm)  
Disc type  
DVD-Video  
DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format)  
Logo  
Indicated in  
these  
[DVD-V]  
[-RW‹VR›]  
instructions by  
Instructions  
High quality movie and music discs  
DVD-RW recorded on another DVD Recorder  
You can play programmes that allow “One time only recording” if they have been  
recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.  
By formatting (56) the disc, you can record to it in DVD-Video format and play it  
on this unit.  
It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for recording.  
.
Disc type  
Logo  
DVD-R  
DVD-R DL  
CD  
Video CD  
Indicated in  
these  
DivX  
DivX  
[CD]  
DivX, MP3, JPEG  
[VCD]  
instructions by  
Instructions  
DVD-R§ with video DVD-R DL§ with  
CD-R and CD-RW§ with  
video recorded in DivX  
Recorded audio and  
music (including CD-  
R/RW§)  
Recorded music and  
video (including CD-R/  
RW§)  
recorded in DivX  
video recorded in  
DivX  
CD-R and CD-RW§ with  
music recorded in MP3  
CD-R and CD-RW§ with still  
pictures recorded in JPEG  
§ Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.  
The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating  
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.  
Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.  
Discs that cannot be played  
2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm  
Types of disc or title recorded on HDD  
for the type of connected TV  
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a  
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.  
(: Possible to view, : Impossible to view)  
3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring  
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit  
and not finalised (77).  
Discs recorded with AVCHD format.  
[For]Asia] DVD-Video with a region number other than “3” or “ALL”  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.] DVD-Video with a region number other than  
“4” or “ALL”  
Disc/Titles  
recorded on HDD  
TV type  
Yes/No  
[For]Middle]East] DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or  
“ALL”  
DVD-Audio  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,  
SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, etc.  
PAL  
NTSC  
PAL  
Multi-system TV  
PAL TV  
NTSC  
PAL  
§1 (PAL60)  
NTSC TV  
§2  
NTSC  
§1  
If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals  
the picture will not be shown correctly.  
Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (66).  
§2  
When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you  
match the “TV System” setting to the title (PAL or NTSC) (66).  
RQT8906  
6
Cards you can use on this unit [EH67]  
Type  
SD Memory Card (from 8 MB to 2 GB)  
SDHC Memory Card (4 GB)  
miniSD Card§  
MultiMediaCard  
The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD Card” in these operating instructions.  
Indicated in these instructions  
by  
[SD]  
Data that can be recorded and  
played  
Still pictures  
Video (SD Video)  
Instructions  
You can insert directly into the SD Card slot.  
§ A miniSD card adaptor included with the miniSD card is necessary.  
You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera etc. (36, 52).  
SD Video shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM.  
(51)  
SD Video cannot be played directly from the SD Card.  
Suitable SD Cards  
When using 4 GB SD Memory Cards, only SD Memory Cards that display the SDHC logo can be used.  
Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.  
Please confirm the latest information on the following website.  
(This site is in English only.)  
If the SD Card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary for recording may be longer. Also, if the SD Card is formatted on a PC, you  
may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on this unit (56, 77).  
This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT 12 and FAT 16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards  
in FAT 32 format.  
SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment. SDHC Memory  
Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.  
This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures on an SD Card.  
We recommend using a Panasonic SD Card.  
Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.  
Structure of folders displayed by this unit [EH67]  
The following  
can be displayed on this unit.  
XXX: Letters  
¢¢¢: Numbers  
Card  
DVD-RAM  
(Higher folder)  
DCIM  
(Picture folder)  
¢¢¢XXXXX  
JPEG  
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG  
(Higher folder)  
DCIM¢¢¢  
(Picture folder)  
¢¢¢XXXXX  
§
IM¢¢CDPF or IMEXPORT  
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG  
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG  
§
DCIM  
¢¢¢XXXXX  
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG  
SD_VIDEO  
(MPEG2 folder)  
PRG¢¢¢  
MOV¢¢¢.MOD  
MOV¢¢¢.MOI  
PRG¢¢¢.PGI  
(MPEG2 information folder)  
MGR_INFO  
§ Folders can be created on other equipment. However, these folders cannot be selected as a copying destination.  
The folder cannot be displayed if the numbers are all “0” (e.g., DCIM000, etc.).  
If a folder name or file name has been input using other equipment, the name may not be displayed properly or you may not be able to play  
or edit the data.  
RQT8906  
7
Important notes for recording  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
Select the main or secondary audio before  
recording  
When recording a  
bilingual programme  
Both main and secondary audio can be recorded.  
You can change the audio during playback.  
(32, Changing audio during play)  
(62, Bilingual Audio Selection)  
M 1  
However in the following cases, select whether to  
record the main or secondary audio:  
–Recording sound in LPCM (62, Audio Mode for  
XP Recording)  
Hello  
The selected  
audio only is  
recorded.  
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The  
default setting is “On”. 61)  
M 2  
M 1  
If you record from external equipment  
–Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.  
Hello  
Hallo  
If you record from external equipment  
–Select both “M 1” and “M 2” on the external  
equipment.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+RW]  
About the aspect when  
recording a programme  
If “Aspect for Recording” in the Setup menu is set to  
“Automatic” (The default setting is “Automatic” 61),  
the programme will be recorded in the original aspect  
used when recording started (including when  
recording started at a commercial, etc.). If recorded  
with a different aspect, select the correct aspect  
(“16:9” or “4:3”).  
Recorded in 4:3 aspect  
However, in the following case, programme will be  
recorded in 4:3.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›]  
Programme recorded using “EP” or “FR (recordings 5  
hours or longer)” recording modes will be recorded in  
4:3 aspect.  
Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (The default setting is “On”. 61).  
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X§); however, the audio and aspect settings  
(above) are necessary before recording to the HDD.  
When you want to copy  
titles in high speed  
mode from the HDD to  
DVD-R, etc.  
§ Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.  
Record to the HDD  
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.  
HDD  
It is not possible to record the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R, +RW  
or 8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (77) compatible DVD-RAM.  
When recording the  
“One time only  
recording” broadcasts  
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
[HDD]  
`
(: Can do, –: Cannot do)  
“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They  
are deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.  
Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.  
You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
Playing the disc on  
other DVD players  
The disc must be finalised after recording or copying (57).  
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play  
them as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record  
or copy.§  
§You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.  
Play on other DVD equipment  
Record to DVD-R, etc.  
Í
/I  
Í
D
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
-
M
A
S
T
E
R
C
D
S
E
Q
U
E
N
T
I
A
L
DISC  
1
2
3
4
5
;
1
:/6  
5/9  
D
I
S
C
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
D
I
S
C
S
K
I
P
<OPEN/CLOSE  
H
RC  
SEA  
R
ENTE  
V
O
L
Y
PLA  
DIS  
U
MEN  
OP  
T
URN  
RET  
NU  
ME  
O
N
OFF  
D
C
IN  
9V  
Finalise  
EN  
OP  
ND  
ROU  
UR  
A.S  
E
EP  
EA  
T
R
MOD  
ITOR  
PIC  
MON  
E
M
ODE  
TUR  
Recording to DVD-R DL You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.  
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.  
and +R DL  
RQT8906  
It is not possible to record to both HDD (Hard Disk Drive) and DVD drive simultaneously.  
8
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care  
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device  
that is easily susceptible to damage.  
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.  
The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust  
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be  
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains  
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.  
The HDD is a temporary storage device  
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or  
saving recorded content to a disc.  
Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD  
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this  
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all  
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.  
When the HDD has been automatically entered power save mode (below), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound.  
This does not indicate a problem with this unit.  
Setup precautions  
Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or  
Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan  
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.  
Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to  
vibration or impact.  
breakdown  
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,  
etc. gets inside the unit.  
While operating  
Do not place on anything that generates  
heat like a video cassette recorder, etc.  
Do not place in an area often subject to  
DO NOT  
Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The  
HDD may become damaged.)  
temperature changes.  
Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains  
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.  
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or  
movement due to rotation is normal.  
This unit  
VCR  
Place in an area where condensation does  
not occur. Condensation is a phenomenon  
where moisture forms on a cold surface  
when there is an extreme change in  
temperature. Condensation may cause internal damage to the  
unit.  
When moving the unit  
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the  
display.)  
Conditions where condensation may occur  
–When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from  
a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or  
when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air  
directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during  
operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on  
the inside of the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD  
heads, etc.  
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.  
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.  
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.  
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating  
for a short time.)  
–When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.  
–During the rainy season.  
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit  
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until  
condensation is gone.  
HDD recording time remaining  
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which  
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.  
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist  
will not increase the amount of time.)  
The HDD automatically enters power save mode  
The HDD has been automatically entered power save mode. (The HDD continues to rotate at high speed while the unit is on. In order to extend  
the life of the HDD, the HDD will be entered power save mode if no operation has been performed for 30 minutes while there is no disc on the disc  
tray.)  
While in power save mode play or recording may not start right away because the HDD takes time to be re-activated.  
When not using the unit, we recommend removing the disc in the tray in order to set the HDD to the power save mode.  
Indemnity concerning recorded content  
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or  
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a  
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).  
RQT8906  
9
Disc and card handling  
How to hold a disc or card  
Handling precautions  
Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.  
Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc  
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)  
Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt  
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.  
Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static  
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.  
Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.  
Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other  
strange things.  
DO  
DO NOT  
Concerning non-cartridge discs  
Be careful about scratches and dirt.  
Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.  
Do not use the following discs:  
If there is dirt or condensation on the disc  
–Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels  
(rental discs, etc.).  
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.  
–Discs that are badly warped or cracked.  
–Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart  
DO  
DO NOT  
DO NOT  
shapes.  
Do not place in the following areas:  
–In direct sunlight.  
–In very dusty or humid areas.  
–Near a heater.  
–Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature  
(condensation can occur).  
–Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.  
To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases  
or cartridges when you are not using them.  
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem  
with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by  
such loss.  
Examples of causes of such losses are  
A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company.  
A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.  
A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.  
Unit care  
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the  
DO NOT  
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.  
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.  
Do not place the unit on  
amplifiers or equipment  
that may become hot.  
The heat can damage the unit.  
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.  
Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.  
Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the  
instructions that came with the cloth.  
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and  
viewing pleasure.  
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it  
[Note]  
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.  
impossible to record or play discs.  
Use the DVD lens cleaner about once every year, depending on  
frequency of use and the operating environment. Carefully read the  
lens cleaner’s instructions before use.  
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.  
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the  
unit.  
DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E  
This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the  
region.  
RQT8906  
10  
Included accessories  
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.  
(Product numbers correct as of April 2007. These may be subject to change.)  
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]  
[For]Asia]  
1
Remote control  
1
AC mains lead  
(N2QAYB000134)  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
2
RF coaxial cables  
2
Batteries  
for remote control  
1
Audio/video  
cable  
1
Remote control  
1
AC mains lead  
(N2QAYB000133)  
[For]Middle]East]  
AC mains lead  
2
For Saudi Arabia  
For use with this unit only. Do not  
use it with other equipment.  
Also, do not use cords for other  
equipment with this unit.  
The remote control information  
Batteries  
Use  
Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.  
Remote control signal sensor  
When closing the lid, insert it from the j (minus) side.  
20  
20  
30  
30  
R6/LR6, AA  
Do not use rechargeable type batteries.  
Do not mix old and new batteries.  
Do not use different types at the same time.  
Do not heat or expose to flame.  
7 m directly in front of the unit  
Do not take apart or short circuit.  
Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.  
Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.  
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can  
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.  
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long  
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.  
Remote control operations (12)  
RQT8906  
11  
Control reference guide  
Remote control  
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.  
1 Turn the unit on (19)  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
2 Select drive [HDD, DVD or SD ([EH67])] (22, 30, 36)  
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].  
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers  
4 To delete unnecessary recorded titles or still pictures ([EH67])  
(46)  
>
5 Basic operations for recording and play  
6 Skip the specified time (32)  
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (32)  
8 Show Top Menu/DIRECT NAVIGATOR (30, 31, 40)  
9 Show OPTION menu (40)  
This menu is used when playing or editing titles and still pictures,  
etc.  
: Select audio (32)  
DVD  
TV  
1
Í
Í
?
@
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
2
3
; Colour buttons for switching between Video/Picture ([EH67]) and  
Video/Playlists, manual tuning settings (30, 49, 65)  
< Show on-screen menu (38)  
2 3  
1
4 5 6  
= Recording functions  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
[¥ REC] Start recording (22)  
A
B
8 9  
7
[REC MODE] Change recording mode (22)  
[F Rec] Start Flexible Recording (25)  
> Transmit the remote control signal  
? Television operations (20)  
DELETE  
-/--  
4
5
0
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
@ Channel select (22)  
A Input select (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV) (54)  
B [For]Australia]and]N.Z.] Show G-CODE screen (26)  
C Exit the menu screen  
D Show Timer Recording screen (27)  
E Show FUNCTION MENU window (59)  
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the  
main functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.  
F Return to previous screen  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
TIME SLIP  
C
D
6
7
K
8
E
F
OK  
G Create chapter (32)  
H Skip approx. 30 seconds forward (32)  
I Show status messages (39)  
9
:
OPTION  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
G
H
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
;
<
=
F Rec  
I
RQT8906  
12  
Main unit  
1
3
4
5
2
OPEN/CLOSE  
REC  
7 8  
9
[EH67]  
<
6
:
;
Opening the front panel  
Place your finger on the protruding section below the 4 and  
REC  
press down to flip open the front panel.  
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (19)  
8 Start play (30)  
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In  
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.  
2 Disc tray (22, 30)  
3 Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (54)  
4 Connection for VCR, camcorder etc. (54)  
5 Display (below)  
9 Start recording (22)/Specify a time to stop recording (24)  
: Open/close disc tray (22, 30)  
; Remote control signal sensor  
< [EH67] SD Card slot (below)  
6 Channel select (22)  
7 Stop (22, 31)  
Rear panel terminals (14–17)  
Inserting, Removing the SD Card [EH67]  
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or remove the card.  
Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the card’s contents.  
Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.  
You can use SD Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 4 GB (7).  
Inserting the card  
Removing the card  
Press on the centre of  
the card.  
1
2
Press on the centre of the  
card until it clicks into  
place.  
If you are using a  
miniSD card, insert it  
into the miniSD card  
adaptor that comes  
with the card.  
Pull it straight out.  
ADAPTER  
Insert and remove this  
adaptor from the unit.  
Insert the card label up with  
the cut-off corner on the right.  
Automatic drive select function  
If you insert an SD Card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card” screen is displayed. Select an item and press [OK] to switch to the SD drive  
(36, 52).  
If you remove an SD Card, the HDD drive is automatically selected.  
The unit’s display  
2
1
3
REC  
[EH67]  
4
5
PLAY  
6
7
8
1 Copying indicator  
Lights during copy.  
2
Recording  
indicator  
Playback  
indicator  
Recording/  
Playback indicator  
REC  
REC  
PLAY  
PLAY  
3 Timer recording indicator  
4 [EH67] SD Card slot indicator  
5 Disc indicator  
6 Drive [HDD, DVD or SD ([EH67])] indicator  
Lights when the HDD, DVD or SD drive is selected.  
7 Main display section indicator  
RQT8906  
Lights when a disc that is supported by this unit is inserted in the  
tray.  
8 Recording mode indicator  
13  
STEP 1 Connection  
Make sure to use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables  
Use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables only when you make connections to the unit through its RF IN and RF OUT terminals. Striping may  
appear and disrupt images on the TV if you use different cables for connection.  
Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.  
Select the connection pattern that matches your environment from pattern A–B. Confirm connections not listed below with your  
dealer.  
When the unit is not to be used for a long time  
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off  
[approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)]  
When “Power Save” is set to “On”, the “Quick Start” function does not work.  
Connecting a television  
A
To the aerial  
To household mains socket  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)  
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]  
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz)  
Aerial  
cable  
Television’s rear panel  
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN  
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
R
L
Red White Yellow  
RF coaxial cable  
(included)  
[For\Saudi\Arabia[  
BE SURE TO  
READ THE  
CAUTION FOR  
THE AC MAINS  
LEAD ON PAGE  
2 BEFORE  
4
CONNECTION.  
1
2
Other connections  
3
(16, 17)  
AC mains lead  
(included)  
Connect only after all other  
connections are complete.  
[For]Middle]East]  
Use the AC mains lead that matches  
the socket for the area you live in.  
Audio/Video cable  
(included)  
Cooling fan  
RF  
IN  
Y
Red White Yellow  
PB  
AV1  
( )  
TV  
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
AC IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
RF coaxial  
cable  
(included)  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal  
You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.  
If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by connecting with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video using RGB  
output on this unit.  
[Required]setting]  
AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (63)  
RQT8906  
14  
Connecting a television and VCR  
B
To household mains socket  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)  
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]  
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz)  
Television’s rear panel  
To the aerial  
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN  
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
R
L
Red White Yellow  
[For\Saudi\Arabia[  
BE SURE TO  
READ THE  
6
CAUTION FOR  
THE AC MAINS  
LEAD ON PAGE  
2 BEFORE  
CONNECTION.  
Other connections  
(16, 17)  
5
AC mains lead  
(included)  
Connect only after all other  
connections are complete.  
[For]Middle]East]  
Use the AC mains lead that matches  
the socket for the area you live in.  
4
2
Audio/Video cable  
(included)  
RF coaxial cable  
(included)  
RF  
IN  
Red White Yellow  
Y
PB  
AV1  
( )  
TV  
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
AC IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
AV OUT  
Red WhiteYellow  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
Cooling fan  
RF coaxial cable  
(included)  
DO NOT  
Connect the unit directly to the television  
If you connect the unit through an AV  
selector or video cassette recorder to the  
television, video signal will be affected by  
copyright protection systems and the picture  
may not be shown correctly.  
2
3
Television  
1
Audio/Video cable  
Aerial cable  
VCR  
This unit  
Red White Yellow  
When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR  
Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there  
are both television and VCR input terminals.  
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
RF OUT  
R
L
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
VCR’s rear panel  
Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal  
You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.  
If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by connecting with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video using RGB  
output on this unit.  
[Required]setting]  
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (63)  
Connecting to a VCR with 21-pin Scart terminal  
You can also connect with the AV2 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.  
[Required]setting]  
“AV2 Input” in the Setup menu (63)  
RQT8906  
15  
STEP 1 Connection  
Other connections  
Leave “Yellow” unconnected.  
§
Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO  
terminals  
Connecting a television with S VIDEO terminals  
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the  
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)  
Television’s rear panel  
Television’s rear panel  
AUDIO IN  
Y
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
R
L
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO  
PB  
PR  
R
L
IN  
IN  
Red White  
Red White  
Component  
Video cable  
§
Audio/Video  
cable  
(included)  
§
§
S Video  
cable  
RF  
IN  
Y
Red White  
Audio/Video cable  
(included)  
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
§
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITTSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
Red White  
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or  
progressive output (77) and provide a purer picture than the  
S VIDEO OUT terminal.  
Connect to terminals of the same colour.  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)  
Use component output with progressive “Off” (The default setting  
63), even if it is progressive compatible, because progressive  
output can cause some flickering. This is the same for multi system  
televisions using PAL mode.  
This unit’s rear panel  
CRT  
DO NOT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Progressive output  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
This unit  
For progressive output (20)  
Connecting an amplifier or system component  
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input  
Connecting a stereo amplifier  
Amplifier’s rear panel  
AUDIO IN  
terminal  
To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an  
amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.  
[Required]setting]  
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (62)  
When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an Optical digital  
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you  
can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting  
“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (63).  
In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the  
television.  
R
L
Red White  
Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),  
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.  
You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.  
Audio cable  
Amplifier’s  
rear panel  
OPTICAL IN  
Red White  
Optical digital  
audio cable  
Do not bend  
sharply when  
connecting.  
Insert fully, with this  
side facing up.  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
Y
PB  
This unit’s rear panel  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
PR  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
RQT8906  
16  
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) terminal  
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital  
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), this unit’s output can be switched  
to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.  
Please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.  
Preparation  
From the Setup menu (63), set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical”.  
Connecting to a TV  
Connecting to a receiver  
Television’s  
rear panel  
Television’s  
rear panel  
HDMI IN  
HDMI IN  
This unit’s  
rear panel  
Receiver’s rear  
panel  
HDMI OUT  
HDMI IN  
HDMI AV OUT  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
This unit’s  
rear panel  
If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel  
audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed  
(77) and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI  
cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)  
HDMI AV OUT  
AV OUT  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible  
with HDCP.  
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content  
Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI  
input terminal (PC monitors, etc.):  
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all  
when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot  
be output.)  
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control TM”  
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?  
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or  
receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating  
instructions for connected equipment for operational details.  
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC  
(Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other manufacturers’  
equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.  
This unit supports “HDAVI Control 2” function.  
“HDAVI Control 2” is the newest standard (current as of February, 2007) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This standard  
is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI equipment.  
It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.  
Recommended part number: RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.  
Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.  
Preparation  
1. Connect this unit to your TV or receiver with an HDMI cable (above).  
2. Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (63). (The default setting is “On”.)  
3. Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment (e.g., TV).  
4. Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment, turn the TV off/on, and then select this unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the  
“HDAVI Control” function works properly.  
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.  
What you can do with “HDAVI Control”  
(When the TV is on)  
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to HDMI input  
mode and the TV displays the corresponding action.  
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)  
Easy playback  
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [PROG/CHECK], [G-Code]§3 etc.  
(When the TV is off)  
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and displays the  
corresponding action.  
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)  
Power on link  
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [PROG/CHECK], [G-Code]§3 etc.  
[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] and MP3  
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.  
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is automatically  
Power off link  
set to standby mode even if the FUNCTION MENU screen etc. is displayed during playback or when the unit set to a  
timer recording.  
Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when recording,  
copying, finalising etc.  
When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver  
will also turn off.  
§1 This button is available only when this unit is on.  
§2 When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents  
from where playback started.  
In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.  
§3 Only for Australia and N.Z.  
[Note]  
These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.  
About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.  
(continued on the next page)  
RQT8906  
17  
STEP 1 Connection  
(continued)  
Easy control only with VIERA remote control  
If you connect this unit to the TV that has “HDAVI Control 2” function with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient functions.  
You can operate this unit using the following buttons on the TV remote control.  
[3, 4, 2, 1], [OK], [RETURN], [EXIT], [OPTION] and the coloured buttons.  
Use the remote control for this unit to operate any other buttons (numbered buttons, etc.) that are not listed above.  
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.  
Using the FUNCTION  
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” window using the TV remote control.  
MENU window to  
If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.  
operate this unit  
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV  
FUNCTION MENU  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
remote control, and press [OK].  
Playback  
Recording  
Delete  
Copy  
To Others  
OK  
RETURN  
About the FUNCTION MENU  
window (59).  
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (below) and display the Top  
Menu for DVD-Video.  
Using the OPTION  
menu window to  
operate this unit  
Control Panel  
Control Panel is  
displayed (below).  
1 Press [OPTION].  
e,g.,  
FUNCTION MENU FUNCTION MENU  
window is displayed  
Control Panel  
FUNCTION MENU  
Top Menu  
(above).  
Menu  
Top Menu [DVD-V]  
Menu [DVD-V]  
Top menu is displayed  
(31).  
Drive Select  
OK  
RETURN  
Menu is displayed  
(31).  
[Note]  
Drive Select  
Select the HDD, DVD or  
SD ([EH67]) drive  
You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top Menu  
for DVD-Video is displayed and while DVD-Video is  
copying.  
Rotate RIGHT  
(JPEG)  
Rotate the still picture  
(37).  
2 Select an item then press [OK].  
Rotate LEFT  
(JPEG)  
Zoom in (JPEG)  
Zoom out (JPEG)  
Enlarge or shrink the still  
picture (37).  
Using the “Control Panel”, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote  
control.  
Perform steps 1 and 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit” (above).  
Using the Control  
Panel  
The Control Panel is displayed (right).  
When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.  
Control Panel  
Pause  
Stop  
–[3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search forward, [OK]:  
Play, [EXIT]: Exit the screen.  
While playing still pictures  
–[4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit  
the screen.  
Exit  
Search  
Play  
Search  
When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode  
Press [Í DVD] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.  
When not using “HDAVI Control”  
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (63).  
RQT8906  
18  
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings  
3 Press [2, 1] to select the item you  
Í/ l  
want to change.  
This is a 24-hour clock.  
REC  
OPEN/CLOSE  
The items change as follows:  
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year  
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J  
Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy (67).  
(Monthly accuracy +/– 15 seconds.)  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
DVD  
TV  
Í DVD  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
4 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.  
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.  
2 3  
1
Numbered  
buttons  
5 Press [OK] when you have finished  
the settings.  
4 5 6  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
8 9  
0
7
DELETE  
-/--  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
TV aspect setting screen appears.  
TV Aspect  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
16:9 WIDE TV  
16:9  
TIME SLIP  
4:3 TV  
Pan & Scan  
Letterbox  
SELECT  
OK  
OK  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
RETURN  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
6 Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect  
F
Rec  
and press [OK].  
16:9:  
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen  
television.  
1 Turn on the television and select the  
Pan & Scan: When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,  
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture (77).  
appropriate AV input to suit the  
connections to this unit.  
2 Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit on.  
Letterbox: When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.  
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style  
(77).  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
The country setting screen appears on the television.  
Country  
Australia  
New Zealand  
Others  
To stop partway  
Press [RETURN].  
If your favourite channel is not received  
after selecting this, please start Auto-Setup  
SELECT  
Restart from Setup.  
OK  
RETURN  
RETURN: leave OK: access  
Press [3, 4] to select the country and press [OK].  
Pre-set channels are set when you select “Australia” in the  
country setting menu.  
Auto-Setup does not start. The clock setting menu  
appears (step 3). If your favourite channel is not  
received after selecting “Australia”, perform “Auto-Setup  
Restart” (66).  
To confirm that stations have been tuned  
correctly (65)  
To restart set up (66)  
Auto-Setup starts. This takes about 5 minutes.  
Auto-Setup  
1
Auto-Setup in progress. Please wait.  
RETURN: to cancel  
RETURN  
Auto-Setup is complete when you see the clock setting menu.  
Clock  
Time  
0
Date  
1
:
00  
:
00  
.
1
.
2007  
Number  
0
9
Please set clock manually.  
OK: store RETURN: leave  
CHANGE  
OK  
SELECT  
RQT8906  
RETURN  
19  
STEP 3Set up to match your television and remote control  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”  
and press [1].  
Setup  
DVD  
TV Aspect  
16:9  
Off  
PAL  
TV  
Progressive  
TV System  
HDMI Settings  
AV1 Output  
AV2 Input  
Í
Í
TV operation  
buttons  
Tuning  
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
Disc  
Video  
Video  
Picture  
Sound  
Display  
2 3  
1
TAB  
RETURN  
SELECT  
OK  
Numbered  
buttons  
Connection  
Others  
4 5 6  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
8 9  
0
7
DELETE  
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Progressive”  
-/--  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
and press [OK].  
Setup  
Progressive  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
On  
Off  
TIME SLIP  
Tuning  
EXIT  
Disc  
Picture  
Sound  
Display  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
SELECT  
OK  
Connection  
Others  
3,4,2,1  
RETURN  
OPTION  
RETURN  
OK  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
6 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press  
F
Rec  
[OK].  
Output becomes progressive.  
[Note]  
When connected to a regular television (CRT: Cathode ray tube) or  
a multi system television using PAL mode, even if it is progressive  
compatible, progressive output can cause some flickering. Turn off  
“Progressive” if this occurs (39).  
Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an  
incompatible television.  
There is no output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals if  
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1 (without  
component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)” (63).  
To enjoy progressive video  
You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma television  
or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan (77).  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
FUNCTION MENU  
HDD  
Remain 70:00 SP  
Playback  
Recording  
Delete  
Copy  
To Others  
OK  
RETURN  
Television operation  
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn  
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the  
television channel and change the television volume.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and  
DVD  
TV  
press [OK].  
Í
Í
Volume  
Setup  
VOL  
CH  
CH  
Turn TV on/off  
Input select  
DRIVE  
Manual Tuning  
SELECT  
AV  
Auto-Setup Restart  
Tuning  
Channel  
Select  
2 3  
1
Disc  
Picture  
Sound  
Display  
4 5 6  
SELECT  
TAB  
Connection  
RETURN  
Others  
1
Point the remote control at the television  
While pressing [Í TV], enter the code  
with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
01:  
[0] [1]  
10:  
[1] [0]  
(continued on the next page)  
RQT8906  
20  
(continued)  
When other Panasonic products  
respond to this remote control  
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote  
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products  
close together.  
Refer to the control reference on page 20.  
Manufacturer and Code No.  
Brand  
Panasonic  
AIWA  
Code  
01/02/03/04  
35  
Brand  
Code  
05/28  
METZ  
MITSUBISHI  
MIVAR  
05/19/20/47  
Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.  
AKAI  
27/30  
24  
36  
33  
BEJING  
BEKO  
33  
NEC  
05/71/72/73/ NOBLEX  
74  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
BENQ  
58/59  
NOKIA  
25/26/27/  
60/61  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
BP  
09  
NORDMENDE  
OLEVIA  
10  
and press [OK].  
BRANDT  
BUSH  
10/15  
05  
45  
ONWA  
30/39/70  
05  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and  
CENTREX  
CHANGHONG  
CURTIS  
DAEWOO  
DESMET  
DUAL  
66  
ORION  
press [OK].  
69  
PEONY  
46/69  
41/48/64  
05/06/46  
05  
05  
PHILCO  
PHILIPS  
PHONOLA  
PIONEER  
PROVIEW  
PYE  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and  
64/65  
05  
press [1].  
05  
37/38  
52  
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Remote  
ELEMIS  
FERGUSON  
FINLUX  
FISHER  
FUJITSU  
FUNAI  
05  
Control” and press [OK].  
10/34  
61  
05  
RADIOLA  
SABA  
05  
6 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD  
21  
10  
1”, “DVD 2” or “DVD 3”) and press  
[OK].  
53  
SALORA  
SAMSUNG  
26  
63/67  
32/42/43/  
65/68  
Remote Control  
Setup  
GOLDSTAR  
GOODMANS  
GRADIENTE  
GRUNDIG  
05/50/51  
SANSUI  
SANYO  
05  
Press “” and “OK” together  
for more than 5 seconds on the remote  
control.  
05  
36  
09  
21/54/55/56  
05/29/30  
Tuning  
Disc  
Picture  
SCHNEIDER  
SEG  
05/69/75/  
76/77/78  
To change the code on the remote control  
HIKONA  
HITACHI  
52  
SELECO  
05/25  
18  
05/22/23/40/ SHARP  
41  
7 While pressing [OK], press and hold  
the numbered button ([1], [2] or [3]) for  
more than 5 seconds.  
INNO HIT  
IRRADIO  
ITT  
05  
30  
25  
49  
SIEMENS  
SINUDYNE  
SONY  
09  
05  
08  
8 Press [OK].  
JINGXING  
TCL  
31/33/66/  
67/69  
When the following indicator appears on the  
JVC  
17/30/39/70  
TELEFUNKEN  
10/11/12/  
13/14  
unit’s display  
KDS  
52  
TEVION  
52  
The unit’s remote control code  
KOLIN  
KONKA  
LG  
45  
TEX ONDA  
THOMSON  
TOSHIBA  
52  
62  
10/15/44  
16/57  
05  
05/50/51  
07/46  
LOEWE  
WHITE  
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s  
WESTINGHOUSE  
(step 7).  
MAG  
52  
YAMAHA  
18/41  
[Note]  
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main  
unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1  
(step 7).  
2 Test by turning on the television and  
changing channels.  
Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows  
correct operation.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for  
your television does not allow control of your television, this  
remote control is not compatible with your television.  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
[Note]  
If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the  
one that allows correct operation.  
RQT8906  
21  
Recording television programmes  
3 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.  
2
REC  
OPEN/CLOSE  
To select with the numbered buttons:  
e.g.,  
5:  
15:  
[5]  
[-/--] [1] [5]  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
3
5
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
4 Press [REC MODE] to select the  
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).  
AV  
1
Numbered  
buttons  
2 3  
1
3
4 5 6  
Remaining time  
on the disc  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
8 9  
0
7
DELETE  
-/--  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):  
Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the  
Setup menu (62).  
;
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
TIME SLIP  
5 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.  
REC  
OK  
3,4,2,1  
OPTION  
RETURN  
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD or on  
disc. Data will not be overwritten.  
You cannot change the channel or recording mode during  
OK  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
AUDIO  
F
Rec  
recording.  
You can record while the unit is in standby for timer  
recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to  
begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and  
the timer recording will begin.  
[HDD] [RAM] When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”  
(61), you can change the audio being received by  
pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (Does not affect the  
recording of audio.)  
5
4
See also “Important notes for recording” (8).  
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of  
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to  
record.  
[RAM] It is not possible to record continuously from one side of a  
double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and  
turn it over.  
[+RW] You can create Top Menu using “Create Top Menu” (57).  
Recording or editing on the disc may delete the menu. In that case,  
create the menu again.  
To pause recording  
Press [;].  
Press again to restart recording.  
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.  
(Title is not split into separate titles.)  
[SD] ([EH67])  
It is not possible to record onto a card.  
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.  
Preparation  
To stop recording  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit  
the connections to this unit.  
Press [].  
From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to  
complete recording management information after recording  
finishes.  
In order to play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R  
(recorded with this unit) on other DVD players, it is necessary to  
finalise them (57).  
Turn on this unit.  
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
HDD or DVD drive.  
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.  
2
If you selected the DVD drive  
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main  
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.  
Press the button again to close the tray.  
When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the  
disc from the cartridge.  
Cartridge disc  
Insert label-up with the  
arrow facing in.  
Insert label-up.  
Quick Start (64)  
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording on DVD-RAM and HDD  
(When connecting to TV using 21-pin Scart, COMPONENT  
VIDEO, VIDEO or S VIDEO terminals)  
From the power on, recording on DVD-RAM and HDD starts in  
about 1 second after the REC button is pressed. (Quick Start  
Mode)  
Insert fully.  
Automatic drive select function  
[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge  
set to “PROTECT” (55, Cartridge-protection)]  
[DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]  
“Quick Start” is set to “On” at the time of purchase.  
If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it  
automatically switches to the DVD drive when a disc is  
inserted.  
If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is  
automatically selected.  
[Note]  
Startup takes up to a minute when:  
You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVD-  
RAM.  
You want to make other operations.  
–The clock has not been set.  
RQT8906  
22  
Recording modes and approximate recording times  
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.  
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)  
HDD  
DVD-RAM  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
+R  
DVD-R DL§3  
(8.5 GB)  
+R DL§3  
(8.5 GB)  
Single-  
Double-  
sided§1  
(9.4 GB)  
Recording Mode  
[EH57]  
(160 GB)  
[EH67]  
(250 GB)  
sided  
+RW  
(4.7 GB)  
(4.7 GB)  
XP (High picture  
quality recording  
mode)  
36 hours  
70 hours  
55 hours  
1 hour  
2 hours  
1 hour  
1 hour 45 min.  
1 hour 45 min.  
SP (Standard  
recording mode)  
111 hours  
2 hours  
4 hours  
4 hours  
8 hours  
2 hours  
4 hours  
3 hours 35 min.  
7 hours 10 min.  
3 hours 35 min.  
7 hours 10 min.  
LP (Long  
recording mode)  
138 hours  
284 hours  
222 hours  
443 hours  
EP (Extra long  
8 hours  
16 hours  
8 hours  
14 hours 20 min.  
recording mode)§4 (212hours§2  
)
(333hours§2  
)
(6 hours§2  
)
(12 hours§2  
)
(6 hours§2  
)
(10 hours 45 min.§2  
)
Approximately  
9 hours with video  
quality equivalent  
to LP mode.  
FR (Flexible  
284 hours  
Recording  
maximum  
Mode)§4  
8 hours  
443 hours  
maximum  
8 hours  
maximum  
8 hours  
maximum  
maximum  
14 hours 20 min.  
for one side  
§1 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.  
§2 When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “EP (6 Hours)” in the Setup menu (61).  
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when using “EP (8 Hours)”.  
§3 You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.  
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode , you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R or +RW discs.  
§4  
[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.  
Use “EP (6 Hours)” mode if playback may be on other equipment.  
[HDD] You can record up to 500 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.  
[+R] [+RW] You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.  
FR (Flexible Recording Mode)  
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings.  
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8 Hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with  
the best possible recording quality.  
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.  
When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.  
All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the display.  
Disc Insertion/Ejection  
When the format confirmation screen is displayed  
When removing a recorded disc  
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or  
other equipment, a format confirmation screen is displayed. Format  
the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents are deleted.  
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc  
for play on other equipment.  
Finalise  
Finalise the disc so that is can be played  
on other DVD players.  
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible  
after finalising. This may take up to min.  
Format  
This disc is not formatted properly.  
Do you want to format the disc now ?  
Press the REC button to start finalise.  
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.  
The disc cannot be played on other  
DVD players without finalising.  
Yes  
No  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
To finalise the disc  
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
You cannot stop this process once you have started it.  
If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a  
disc name, select “Top Menu” (57), “Auto-Play Select” (57) or  
“Disc Name” (55) in “DVD Management” before finalising.  
To format a disc  
“Deleting all the contents of a disc or card—Format” (56)  
RQT8906  
To open the tray without disc finalisation  
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.  
23  
Recording television programmes  
Recording settings for High Speed  
Copy  
REC  
OPEN/CLOSE  
When copying in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, set “Rec  
for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.  
(The default setting is “On”. 61)  
1
¥ REC  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
However, some restrictions apply:  
DVD  
Refer to the “When recording a bilingual programme” and “About  
the aspect when recording a programme” for more information  
(8).  
TV  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
2 3  
1
[Note]  
Numbered  
buttons  
4 5 6  
If you do not intend to copy titles in high speed mode to DVD-R,  
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, set  
“Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”.  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
8 9  
7
DELETE  
-/--  
0
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
1
TIME SLIP  
DIRECT  
NAVIGATOR  
OK  
3,4,2,1  
OPTION  
RETURN  
OK  
RETURN  
STATUS  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
F
Rec  
F Rec  
To specify a time to stop recording—  
One Touch Recording  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
During recording  
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select the recording  
time.  
You can specify up to 4 hours later.  
The unit display changes as shown below.  
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00  
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00  
,"" OFF 3:00 ,}  
This does not work during timer recordings (26) or while using  
Flexible Recording (25).  
The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is  
reached.  
To cancel  
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter  
appears.  
The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording  
continues.  
To stop recording  
Press [].  
RQT8906  
24  
Flexible Recording  
Playing while you are recording  
[HDD] [RAM]  
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the recording  
within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR  
mode.  
Playing from the beginning of the title you are  
recording—Chasing playback  
Press [1] (PLAY) during recording.  
Using “Flexible Rec” is convenient in these  
There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.  
kinds of situations.  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an  
appropriate recording mode difficult  
To stop play  
Press [].  
When you want to record a long programme with the best picture  
quality possible  
To stop recording  
2 seconds after play stops, press [].  
[HDD]  
When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be  
copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly  
You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording  
mode when copying, to fit the disc space  
To stop timer recording  
2 seconds after play stops  
1
2
Press [].  
e.g., Recording a 90 minute programme to disc  
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].  
If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit one disc.  
If you try to record a 90 minute  
programme in XP mode, only the  
first 60 minutes will fit on the disc  
and the 30 minute balance will not  
Playing a title previously recorded while recording—  
Simultaneous rec and play  
You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press  
[DRIVE SELECT].  
4.7GB  
DVD-RAM  
4.7GB  
DVD-RAM  
get recorded.  
Another disc is necessary.  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during  
recording.  
If you select SP mode, the programme will fit one disc.  
However there will be 30 minutes  
remaining disc space.  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title  
4.7GB  
DVD-RAM  
and press [OK].  
There is no sound output while searching forward or  
backward.  
If you select “Flexible Rec” the programme will fit one disc  
perfectly.  
To stop play  
Press [].  
4.7GB  
DVD-RAM  
To exit the Direct Navigator screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Necessary space for recording  
To stop recording  
After play stops  
Preparation  
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.  
If the recording is on the other drive  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.  
Press [].  
Select the channel or the external input to record.  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
3
1
While stopped  
Press [F Rec].  
To stop timer recording  
After play stops  
Flexible Rec  
Record in FR mode.  
Maximum recording time  
This is the maximum recording  
time in EP (8 Hours) mode.  
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.  
If the recording is on the other drive  
Maximum rec. time 8 Hour 00 Min.  
Set rec. time  
8 Hour 00 Min.  
Start  
Cancel  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.  
Press [].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].  
3
4
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and  
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the  
recording time.  
[Note]  
You can also set the recording time with the numbered  
buttons.  
“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be  
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).  
You cannot record more than 8 hours.  
3
When you want to start recording  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start”  
and press [OK].  
Recording starts.  
XP  
SP  
LP  
EP  
All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in  
the display.  
To exit the screen without recording  
Press [RETURN].  
e.g., HDD  
HDD  
REC 0:59  
ARD  
M 1 / M 2  
L R  
To stop recording partway  
Remaining  
time of  
recording  
Press [].  
To show the remaining time  
Press [STATUS].  
RQT8906  
25  
Timer recording  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Using G-CODE system to make timer  
recordings  
Entering G-CODE numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You can  
find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers and magazines.  
DVD  
TV  
Í
Í DVD  
Í
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
1 Press [G-Code].  
1:58 SP  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
Numbered  
buttons  
G-Code  
Record  
Remain  
12:53:00 15. 7. TUE  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
8 9  
0
7
DELETE  
-/--  
G-Code  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
Input G-Code Number 0-9, and press OK.  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
2 Press the numbered buttons to enter  
TIME SLIP  
PROG/CHECK  
the G-CODE number.  
Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
OK  
3 Press [OK].  
1:58 SP  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
OPTION  
RETURN  
Timer  
Remain  
CREATE  
Recording  
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
HDD  
DVD  
F
Rec  
Name  
Date  
Start  
19:00  
Stop  
20:00  
Mode  
SP  
REC MODE  
1
ARD 15. 7.TUE  
HDD  
Programme Name  
Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV  
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using  
[3, 4, 2, 1] (27, step 3).  
When “-- ---” appears in the “Name” column, you cannot set  
timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired programme  
position. After you have entered the information of a TV  
station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.  
See also “Important notes for recording” (8).  
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of  
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to  
record.  
4 Press [OK].  
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is  
displayed.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.  
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)  
No. Name  
01  
Timer icon  
ARD  
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.  
Preparation  
F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording  
standby has been activated.  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit  
the connections to this unit.  
If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording  
(22).  
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE  
Drive  
HDD  
space  
Mode  
SP  
Stop  
20:00  
DVD  
Make sure that the clock settings are correct (67).  
Check to make sure “OK”  
HDD  
OK  
is displayed (29).  
Programme  
Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings.  
Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit off.  
To cancel recording when recording has already  
begun (28)  
To release the unit from recording standby  
(28)  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Notes on timer recording (28)  
G-CODE is a registered trademark of  
Gemstar Development Corporation. The  
G-CODE system is manufactured under  
license from Gemstar Development  
Corporation.  
RQT8906  
26  
Manually programming timer  
recordings  
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].  
1:58 SP  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
Timer  
Remain  
Recording  
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE  
HDD  
Drive  
No. Name  
F01 ARD  
Date  
15. 7.TUE  
Start Stop  
20:00  
DVD Mode  
space  
HDD  
19:00  
SP  
OK  
New Timer Programme  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer  
Programme” and press [OK].  
3 Press [1] to move through the items  
and change the items with [3, 4].  
1:58 SP  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
Timer  
Remain  
Recording  
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE  
HDD  
DVD  
Name  
Date  
Start  
22:00  
Stop  
22:30  
Mode  
1
ARD 15. 7.TUE  
HDD SP  
Programme Name  
Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and  
Stop (Finish time) in 30-minute increments.  
You can also set Name (Programme position/TV Station  
Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with  
the numbered buttons.  
Date  
[. Date:  
Current date up to one month later minus  
one day  
l
l
l
;:  
Daily timer: SUN-SAT>MON-SAT>MON-FRI  
;:  
a. Weekly timer: SUN>--->SAT  
You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording  
drive.  
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough  
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the  
“HDD” (29, Relief Recording).  
You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording  
mode.  
[HDD] RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (29)  
ON!)OFF  
Programme Name  
Press [2, 1] to select “Programme Name” and press [OK].  
(58, Entering text)  
4 Press [OK].  
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is  
displayed.  
No. Name  
01  
Timer icon  
ARD  
F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording  
standby has been activated.  
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE  
Drive  
HDD  
space  
Mode  
SP  
Stop  
20:00  
DVD  
Check to make sure “OK”  
HDD  
OK  
is displayed (29).  
Programme  
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.  
Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit off.  
To cancel recording when recording has already  
begun (28)  
To release the unit from recording standby  
(28)  
Notes on timer recording (28)  
RQT8906  
27  
Timer recording  
To cancel recording when recording  
has already begun  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
1
While the unit is on  
DVD  
TV  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
recording drive and press [].  
Stop Recording  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
2 3  
Timer recording in progress.  
Stop this timer recording?  
It will be cancelled if you stop.  
1
4 5 6  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
Cancel  
Stop Recording  
8 9  
0
7
SELECT  
DELETE  
-/--  
DELETE ¢  
RETURN  
OK  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
Recording” and press [OK].  
TIME SLIP  
If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if  
you have set a weekly or daily timer recording, the recording  
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.  
PROG/CHECK  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
OK  
To release the unit from recording  
standby  
OPTION  
RETURN  
OPTION  
“Red”  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer  
F
Rec  
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].  
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme  
and press the “Red” button.  
The timer icon “F” (29, left column) disappears from the  
timer recording list.  
You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as  
even one timer icon “F” (29, left column) remains in the  
timer recording list.  
Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording  
standby.  
Notes on timer recording  
When a timer recording is set, DVDs that were recorded using a  
different TV system cannot be played unless the TV system is  
changed in the Setup menu (66) or the timer recording has  
completed or has been cancelled.  
Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is  
turned on/off.  
Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when  
playing.  
Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal  
speed mode (47).  
If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains  
turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.  
You can turn the unit off during timer recording.  
If the unit is not put in the timer recording standby mode at the last  
10 minutes before the programmed timer recording starting time,  
the “F” flashes on the unit’s display.  
When you programme successive timer recordings to start  
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at  
the beginning of the later programmes.  
Programme  
Programme  
Not recorded  
Recorded  
Recorded  
If the actual broadcasting times of timer recordings overlap, the  
recording that starts first always has priority, and the recording of  
the later programme will start only after the first timer recording has  
finished.  
RQT8906  
28  
Check, change or delete a programme  
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer  
Relief Recording  
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough  
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If  
there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when  
timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be  
altered to the HDD.  
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].  
Press [PROG/CHECK].  
The Direct Navigator shows which programmes were relief-  
Icons  
F
[
W
Timer recording standby is activated.  
This programme is currently recording.  
The times overlap those in another programme.  
Recording of the programme with the later start time  
starts when the earlier programme finishes recording.  
You stopped a weekly or daily timer recording. The icon  
disappears the next time the timer programme starts  
recording.  
The disc was full so the programme failed to record.  
The material was copy-protected so it was not  
recorded.  
The programme did not complete recording because  
the disc is dirty or some other reason.  
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording  
(right column).  
recorded (“ ” is displayed.) (30).  
If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the  
programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.  
Auto Renewal Recording  
[HDD]  
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every  
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme  
over the old one.  
F
X
This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily  
recording is selected.  
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].  
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD  
(Displayed while recording.)  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme  
and press [OK].  
HDD Recording drive is set to HDD  
DVD Recording drive is set to DVD  
3 Press [2, 1] to select “RENEW”  
column.  
1:58 SP  
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE  
Timer  
Remain  
Date  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
Recording  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press  
HDD  
Start Stop DVD  
Drive  
Mode  
No. Name  
space  
[OK].  
New Timer Programme  
1:58 SP  
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE  
Timer  
Remain  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
Recording  
HDD  
DVD  
RENEW  
ON  
Name  
Date  
SUN  
Start  
22:00  
Stop  
Mode  
SP  
1
ARD  
22:30 HDD  
Programme Name  
Press OK to store new programme.  
OK  
RETURN  
[Note]  
Message displayed in the “Drive space” line  
If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or  
while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the  
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for  
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this  
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto  
Renewal Recording takes place.  
Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal  
Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.  
When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may  
not be recorded completely.  
OK:  
Displayed if the recording can fit in the  
remaining space.  
> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display  
will show until when recordings can be made (up  
to a maximum of one month from the present  
time) based on the time remaining on the disc.  
! :  
It may not be possible to record because:  
there is not enough space left  
the number of possible titles has reached its  
maximum.  
Relief: Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to  
the HDD.  
To change a programme  
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OK]. (27,  
step 3)  
To delete a programme  
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [DELETE ¢].  
You can also delete a programme with the following steps  
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
To exit the timer recording list  
Press [PROG/CHECK].  
Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer  
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.  
RQT8906  
29  
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs  
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—  
Direct Navigator  
2
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
(This function does not work with finalised discs.)  
REC  
OPEN/CLOSE  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Thumbnail Display  
Table Display  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
HDD  
Title View  
008  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
HDD  
Title View  
3
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title  
- - -  
007  
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
001  
002  
003  
004  
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30  
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15  
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00  
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05  
SELECT  
AV  
ARD 10.10. FRI  
- - -  
ARD 11.10. SAT  
- - -  
1
Numbered  
buttons  
Rec time  
0:52(SP)  
- - -  
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10  
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25  
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30  
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00  
---  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
Previous  
Page 02/02  
Next  
Page 01/01  
OK  
OK  
Previous  
Select  
OPTION  
Next  
Select  
OPTION  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
RETURN  
RETURN  
8 9  
7
Switching the Direct Navigator appearance  
DELETE  
-/--  
0
1 Press [OPTION] while Thumbnail Display is displayed.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Table Display” and press [OK].  
The display appearance last used is saved even after the unit is  
turned off.  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
6, 5  
:, 9  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
3
;
TIME SLIP  
[HDD] To sort Title View for easy searching (Table Display only)  
This function is convenient when searching for one title to  
playback from many titles.  
TIME SLIP  
DIRECT  
2;, ;1  
NAVIGATOR,  
“Top Menu”  
1 Press [OPTION].  
OK  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
If you select an item other than “No.”  
The Direct Navigator screen will reappear after playback of the  
selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)  
Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being  
played back.  
If you exit the Direct Navigator screen, or switch to “PICTURE”  
Direct Navigator screen ([EH67]), the sorted Title View will be  
cancelled.  
3,4,2,1  
OPTION  
RETURN  
OK  
RETURN  
OPTION  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
MANUAL SKIP  
AUDIO,  
“Red”  
F
Rec  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the  
following cases.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded using “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours  
or longer)” recording mode.  
If you recorded to a +R or +RW.  
2 [EH67]  
If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in the  
Setup menu (61).  
However, if you recorded to the HDD or a DVD-RAM and “Rec for  
High Speed Copy” was set to “Off” in the Setup menu (61), the  
aspect will remain 16:9.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
HDD  
Title View  
VIDEO  
PICTURE  
The illustration shows the  
display of DMR-EH67.  
- - -  
007  
008  
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to  
your television’s operating instructions.  
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press  
[OK].  
Preparation  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit  
the connections to this unit.  
You can also select titles with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
[HDD]  
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Turn on this unit.  
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
5:  
15:  
115:  
[0] [0] [5]  
[0] [1] [5]  
[1] [1] [5]  
5:  
15:  
[0] [5]  
[1] [5]  
HDD or DVD drive.  
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.  
It is possible to watch playback from one drive while  
recording on another (editing is not possible).  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press  
[OK]. (Thumbnail Display only)  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
2
If you selected the DVD drive  
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main  
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Press the button again to close the tray.  
When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the  
disc from the cartridge.  
Direct Navigator screen icons  
Cartridge disc  
[
Currently recording.  
Insert label-up.  
Insert label-up with the  
arrow facing in.  
Title protected.  
Title that was not recorded due to recording  
protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)  
Title cannot be played  
[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is  
damaged etc.]  
t
Insert fully.  
Automatic drive select function (22)  
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD  
(29, Relief Recording)  
3 Press [1] (PLAY).  
Title with “One time only recording” restriction  
(77, CPRM)  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.  
[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] and MP3  
Title recorded using a different encoding system  
(NTSC)  
(PAL)  
from that of the TV system currently selected on the  
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.  
DivX  
DivX Menu screen appears (34).  
unit.  
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit  
(66).  
When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the  
protect position (55), play automatically starts when  
inserted in the unit.  
RQT8906  
30  
When a menu screen appears on the television  
[DVD-V]  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [OK].  
Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.  
If “ENTER” appears on the screen, press [OK].  
[VCD]  
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] [5]  
15:  
[1] [5]  
To return to the menu screen  
[DVD-V] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
You can also return to the menu screen with the following steps.  
1
2
Press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press [OK].  
[VCD] Press [RETURN].  
[Note]  
When recording while the “TV System” is set to “PAL”, discs recorded in NTSC format cannot be played. To play, change the “TV System” to  
“NTSC” in the Setup menu (66).  
It is not possible to play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it over.  
Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen, pictures, sound, etc. to start.  
Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [] when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television screen  
and so on.  
The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating  
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.  
When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (66).  
Operations during play  
Press [].  
The stopped position is memorized.  
Stop  
Resume play function  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.  
Stopped position  
If [] is pressed several times, the position is cleared.  
The position is cleared if the tray is opened.  
[CD] [VCD] and MP3/DivX :The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.  
Press [;].  
Pause  
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
Press [6] or [5].  
The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
Search  
Audio is heard during first level search forward.  
[CD] and MP3 : Audio is heard during all levels of search.  
DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels of search.  
Depending on the disc, Search may not be possible.  
During play or while paused, press [:] or [9].  
Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to play.  
Skip  
Each press increases the number of skips.  
DivX : Press [:] to return to the beginning of the title currently playing.  
Press the numbered buttons.  
Starting from a selected  
title  
Play starts from the selected title, chapter or track.  
[HDD]  
e.g., 5: [0] [0] [5]  
15: [0] [1] [5]  
MP3 and JPEG  
e.g., 5: [0] [0] [0] [5]  
15: [0] [0] [1] [5]  
Other discs  
Input a 2-digit number  
e.g., 5: [0] [5]  
15: [1] [5]  
This works only when stopped (right, Screen saver is displayed on the  
television.) with some discs.  
[VCD] (with playback control)  
If you press the numbered buttons while stopped (the above screen saver is displayed on the  
television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play time appears on the unit’s display.)  
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).  
Play speed is quicker than normal.  
Quick View  
[HDD] [RAM]  
RQT8906  
Press again to return to normal speed.  
(Continued on the next page)  
31  
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs  
Refer to the control reference on page 30.  
Operations during play  
(continued)  
While paused, press [6] or [5].  
The speed increases up to 5 steps.  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
Slow-motion  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]  
[VCD] Forward direction [5] only.  
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]  
The unit will pause if slow-motion play is continued for approximately 5 minutes  
(excluding [DVD-V] [VCD]).  
While paused, press [2] (2;) or [1] (;1).  
Each press shows the next frame.  
Press and hold to change in succession forward or backward.  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
Frame-by-frame  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]  
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]  
[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.  
1 Press [TIME SLIP].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the time  
Skipping the specified  
time (Time Slip)  
-
5 min  
This automatically  
disappears after  
approximately 5  
and press [OK].  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
Play skips the specified time.  
Each time you press [3, 4], the time  
increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1 minute  
intervals. (Press and hold for 10-minute  
intervals.)  
seconds. To show the  
screen again press  
[TIME SLIP] again.  
(This function does not work with  
finalised discs.)  
Press [MANUAL SKIP].  
Each time you press, skip approx. 30 seconds forward.  
Manual Skip  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
(This function does not work with  
finalised discs.)  
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].  
Chapters are divided at the point pressed.  
Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a chapter.  
Create Chapter  
(40, Title/Chapter)  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Changing audio during play  
Press [AUDIO].  
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX  
LR>L>R  
[DVD-V]  
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the  
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack  
language (38, Soundtrack).  
^---------------}  
HDD  
PLAY  
1 ENG  
Î Digital 3/2.1ch  
Soundtrack  
e.g., English is selected.  
e.g., “L R” is selected  
L R  
[Note]  
You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.  
When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.  
When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (62).  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The default setting is “On”. 61).  
RQT8906  
32  
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG)  
Regarding DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG)  
DivX  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]  
[CD] Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended  
formats) and Joliet  
Playable  
discs  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]  
This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the  
disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.  
Operation may take time to complete when there are many files  
(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some files (tracks) may not  
display or be playable.  
File  
format  
DivX  
Files must have the extension  
“.DIVX”, “.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.  
English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.  
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.  
The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is  
displayed on a computer.  
Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files  
(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you  
numbered them.  
Number  
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300 folders  
of folders (including the root folder)  
Maximum number of files recognizable§1: 200 files  
Number  
of files  
Support  
version  
Plays all versions of DivX video (including DivX 6) with  
standard playback of DivX media files.  
Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile.  
Video  
This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.  
Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.  
–Number of stream: Up to 1  
–Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50  
–Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576  
–FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps  
Audio  
–Number of stream: Up to 8  
–Format: MP3, MPEG, AC3  
[EH67]  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
Compatible formats: DCF§4 compliant (Content recorded on a  
digital camera, etc.)  
§4 Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard  
established by Japan Electronics and Information Technology  
Industries Association (JEITA).  
–Multi channel: AC3 is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch  
conversion.  
GMC (Global Motion Compensation) is not supported.  
You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by  
making folders as shown below. However depending on how  
you create the disc (writing software), play may not be in the  
order you numbered the folders.  
MP3  
Playable  
discs  
[CD]  
File  
format  
MP3  
[CD]  
Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.  
Root  
Structure of MP3 folders  
(folder=group)  
001  
Prefix with 3-digit numbers  
in the order you want to play  
them.  
Number  
Maximum number of folders (groups) recognizable:  
of folders 300 folders (groups)  
(file=track)  
001track.mp3  
002track.mp3  
003track.mp3  
(groups)  
(including the root folder)  
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable§1  
3000 files (tracks)  
:
Number  
of files  
(tracks)  
002 group  
001track.mp3  
002track.mp3  
003track.mp3  
004track.mp3  
003 group  
Bit rates  
32 kbps to 320 kbps  
001track.mp3  
002track.mp3  
003track.mp3  
Order of play  
Sampling 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/48 kHz  
frequency  
[CD]  
ID3 tags  
not compatible  
Root  
Structures of still pictures  
Files inside a folder are displayed  
in the order they were updated or  
taken.  
P0000001.jpg  
P0000002.jpg  
If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,  
play may not be possible.  
002 Folder  
Still pictures (JPEG§2  
Playable [EH57]: [CD]  
discs and [EH67]: [HDD] [RAM] [CD] [SD]  
cards  
)
P0000003.jpg  
P0000004.jpg  
P0000005.jpg  
003 Folder  
P0000006.jpg  
P0000007.jpg  
P0000008.jpg  
P0000009.jpg  
004 Folder  
File  
File format: JPEG  
format  
Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.  
P0000010.jpg  
P0000011.jpg  
P0000012.jpg  
Order of play  
Number  
of pixels  
Between 34k34 and 6144k4096  
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)  
Number  
of  
folders§3  
[CD] Maximum number of folders recognizable:300  
folders (including the root folder)  
[Note]  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of  
While recording, DivX or still pictures (JPEG) cannot be played.  
300 folders (including higher folders)  
[CD] Maximum number of files recognizable§1:3000  
files  
Number  
of files§3  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of  
3000 files  
MOTION  
JPEG  
not supported  
§1 Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG, DivX and  
other types of files is 4000.  
§2 It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.  
§3 When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not  
display or be playable.  
RQT8906  
33  
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG)  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Playing DivX discs  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]  
You can play DVD-R, DVD-R DL and CD-R/CD-RW discs which  
contain DivX video contents that have been recorded on a computer.  
DVD  
TV  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
DRIVE SELECT  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
Numbered  
buttons  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
8 9  
7
Folder1  
:
00025  
DivX Menu  
CD (DivX)  
DELETE  
-/--  
0
No.  
001  
Name of Title  
Tree  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
ABC.avi  
:, 9  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
1
TIME SLIP  
Page  
001/001  
Total Title : 001  
OK  
RETURN  
DIRECT  
NAVIGATOR  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
Files are treated as titles.  
OK  
When the MP3 or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps  
1–4 in “To select file type” on the left column selecting “DivX”  
in step 4 to change the playback mode.  
3,4,2,1  
OPTION  
RETURN  
OK  
RETURN  
STATUS  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
OPTION  
“Green”  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and  
F
Rec  
press [OK].  
Play starts on the selected title.  
You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.  
Selecting file type to play  
[CD]  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] [0] [5]  
15:  
[0] [1] [5]  
You can play CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain MP3 files, DivX  
video contents or still pictures that have been recorded on a  
computer.  
To stop playing  
Press [].  
The screen shown below is displayed when you insert a disc  
To show other pages  
Press [:, 9].  
containing DivX video contents, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG).  
e.g.,  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Play mode is set to DivX.  
To play another type of file,  
select the file type  
[Note]  
from ''Playback'' in FUNCTION MENU.  
Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from  
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to  
adjust the aspect through the TV.  
Successive play is not possible.  
Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD  
drive.  
When playing the file displayed on the screen  
Press [OK].  
When you want to play files other than the one displayed on the  
screen  
Follow the steps below.  
To select file type  
Using the tree screen to find a folder  
1 Press [RETURN].  
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
FUNCTION MENU  
1 While the file list is displayed  
Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display  
the tree screen.  
CD(DivX/MP3/JPEG)  
Play Mode : DivX  
Playback  
Recording  
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.  
Copy  
Folder  
DivX Menu  
CD (DivX)  
To Others  
OK  
F
1/21  
RETURN  
12.02.2004  
Image001  
Image002  
Image003  
Image004  
Image005  
Image006  
Image007  
Image008  
Image009  
Image010  
DATA1  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playback” and press  
[OK].  
You cannot select  
folders that contain no  
compatible files.  
DATA2  
OK  
RETURN  
Playback  
Select file type.  
DivX  
2 Press [  
3
,
4] to select a folder and press [OK].  
MP3  
The file list for the folder appears.  
JPEG  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select playback mode and press  
[OK].  
If “DivX” is selected: Go to “Playing DivX discs” step 2 in the right  
column.  
If “MP3” is selected: Go to “Playing MP3 discs” step 2  
on page 35.  
If “JPEG” is selected: Go to “Playing still pictures” step 4 on page  
36.  
RQT8906  
34  
Regarding DivX VOD content  
Playing MP3 discs  
[CD]  
You can play CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain MP3 files that have  
been recorded on a computer.  
DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content is encrypted for copyright  
protection. In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first  
need to register the unit.  
Follow the on line instructions for purchasing DivX VOD content to  
enter the unit’s registration code and register the unit. For more  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
Display the unit’s registration code.  
(64, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
DivX Registration  
Setup  
Selected group  
DivX (R) Video On Demand  
No.  
Group  
My favorite  
MP3 Menu  
1
Total  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
:
G: Group No.  
G
1
Tuning  
Track  
Tree  
T
1
T: Track No. in the group  
TOTAL: Track No./Total  
tracks in all groups  
001 Both Ends Freezing  
TOTAL  
8 alphanumeric  
characters  
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX  
002 Lady Starfish  
003 Life on Jupiter  
004 Metal Glue  
005 Paint It Yellow  
006 Pyjamamama  
007 Shrimps from Mars  
008 Starperson  
1/111  
Disc  
Picture  
Sound  
Display  
Number  
0
9
Prev.  
Next  
8
SELECT  
OK  
9
10  
009 Velvet Cuppermine  
010 Ziggy Starfish  
Connection  
Others  
OK  
RETURN  
Page 001/024  
RETURN  
Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.  
After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another  
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not  
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you  
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the  
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content  
that you purchased using the previous code.  
If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code  
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this  
content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)  
When the DivX or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps 1–4 in  
To select file type” on page 34 selecting “MP3” in step 4 to change  
the playback mode.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and  
press [OK].  
Play starts on the selected track.  
0” indicates the track currently playing.  
You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] [0] [0] [5]  
15:  
[0] [0] [1] [5]  
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of  
times  
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.  
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is  
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of  
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired” is displayed.)  
To stop playing  
Press [].  
To show other pages  
Press [:, 9].  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
When playing this content  
The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if  
–you press [Í DVD].  
–you press [].  
Using the tree screen to find a group  
–you press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
–you press [:] or [6, 5] etc. and arrive at another content  
or the start of the content being played.  
–timer recording starts on the HDD.  
–you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.  
Resume functions do not work.  
1 While the file list is displayed  
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display  
the tree screen.  
Selected group No. /Total groups  
If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.  
MP3 Menu  
Tree  
G
T
TOTAL  
8
14  
MP3 music  
G
7/25  
001 My favorite  
001 Brazilian pops  
002 Chinese pops  
003 Czech pops  
004 Hungarian pops  
005 Liner notes  
40/111  
Number  
You cannot select groups  
that contain no compatible  
files.  
0
9
006 Japanese pops  
007 Mexican pops  
008 Philippine pops  
009 Swedish pops  
001 Momoko  
002 Standard number  
001 Piano solo  
002 Vocal  
SELECT  
OK  
RETURN  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press  
[OK].  
The file list for the group appears.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
RQT8906  
35  
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG)  
Refer to the control reference on page 34.  
Instructions/notes regarding SD Cards and SD Drive are  
applicable to the DMR-EH67 model only.  
3
[EH67]  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
album and press [OK].  
Playing still pictures  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View  
e.g., HDD  
PICTURE  
HDD  
Playable discs and cards are: [EH57]: [CD]  
Album Name 103__DVD  
0001  
0005  
0009  
0002  
0006  
----  
0003  
0007  
----  
0004  
0008  
----  
[EH67]: [HDD] [RAM] [CD] [SD]  
You can playback still pictures recorded onto a CD-R/CD-RW on a  
PC.  
You can use SD Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 4 GB (7).  
You cannot playback still pictures while recording or copying.  
Inserting, Removing the SD Card [EH67] (13)  
Page 001/001  
Previous  
Next  
OK  
Select  
OPTION  
RETURN  
You can also select album with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] [0] [5]  
While stopped put the card in the slot, and the menu (below)  
is automatically displayed.  
15: [0] [1] [5]  
115: [1] [1] [5]  
Press [3, 4] to select “Album View” and then press [OK] to  
display the Album View screen shown in step 2.  
SD Card  
Press [2, 1] to select the previous or next album.  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still  
Album View  
Copy Pictures (JPEG)  
Copy Video (MPEG2)  
picture and press [OK].  
You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
5:  
[0] [0] [0] [5]  
115: [0] [1] [1] [5]  
15: [0] [0] [1] [5]  
1115: [1] [1] [1] [5]  
Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.  
Useful functions during still picture play (37)  
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View  
screen  
Press [RETURN].  
HDD, DVD or SD drive.  
The indicator lights up on the unit’s display.  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View  
HDD  
Album View screen  
VIDEO  
PICTURE  
- - -  
001  
002  
Recording date of the  
first picture in the album/  
number of pictures/  
album name.  
1. 1. 06 Total  
Date: 1. 1.2006  
5
1. 2. 06 Total  
Date: 1. 2.2006  
3
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
Page 01/01  
OPTION  
Previous  
Next  
The illustration shows the  
display of DMR-EH67.  
OK  
Press OK to show  
pictures.  
Slide Show  
RETURN  
Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the  
PC etc., the information about the recording date may not be  
displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].  
[HDD] [RAM] If “VIDEO” is selected, press the “Green” button to  
select “PICTURE”.  
[CD]  
JPEG Menu  
CD(JPEG)  
Picture (JPEG) View  
103__DVD  
Picture (JPEG) View  
screen  
Folder  
0001  
0005  
0009  
0002  
0003  
0007  
----  
0004  
0008  
----  
0006  
----  
Page 001/001  
Previous  
Next  
OK  
RETURN  
(Go to step 4)  
When the DivX or MP3 Menu is displayed, perform steps 1–4  
in “To select file type” on page 34 selecting “JPEG” in step 4 to  
change the playback mode.  
Direct Navigator screen icons  
Picture and folder protected.  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press  
[OK].  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
RQT8906  
To select the still pictures in another folder (37)  
36  
Useful functions during still picture play  
Playable discs and cards are: [EH57]: [CD]  
[EH67]: [HDD] [RAM] [CD] [SD]  
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.  
Start Slide Show  
Slide Show Setting  
Slide Interval  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
1 While the Album View screen is displayed  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.  
2 Press [1] (PLAY).  
You can also start Slide Show with the following steps.  
Start Slide Show  
Slide Show Setting  
1
While the Album View screen is displayed  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the desired album and press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [OK].  
2
The illustration shows the  
display of DMR-EH67.  
[CD]  
1 While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OPTION].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [OK].  
To change the display interval  
1
[EH67] Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [OK].  
[EH57] Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Interval” in step 2 and press [OK]. (Go to step 3)  
[EH67] Press [3, 4] to select “Display interval”.  
2
3
Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval (0–30 seconds) and press [OK].  
Repeat Play ([EH67])  
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [OK].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play”.  
Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].  
1 While playing  
Rotate  
Rotate RIGHT  
Press [OPTION].  
Rotate LEFT  
OK  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and  
RETURN  
press [OK].  
Rotation information will not be stored.  
[CD] Still pictures  
–When disc or album is protected  
–When played on other equipment  
–When copying pictures  
If you remove the SD Card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed, picture rotation  
information may not be properly stored. Remove the SD Card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
screen.  
1 While playing  
Zoom in  
Zoom out  
Rotate RIGHT  
Press [OPTION].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [OK].  
To return the picture to its original size, press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and  
Rotate LEFT  
Zoom in  
OK  
RETURN  
press [OK].  
When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.  
The enlargement information will not be stored.  
The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures smaller than  
640 a 480 pixels.  
While playing  
e.g., HDD  
Press [STATUS] twice.  
Properties  
18:53:50 11.10.  
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006  
Date  
1. 1. 2005  
No.  
3 / 9  
To exit the picture properties screen  
Press [STATUS].  
Shooting date  
To select the still pictures in another folder  
[RAM] [SD] (7, Structure of folders displayed by this unit [EH67])  
To switch to another higher folder  
[CD]  
1 While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed  
(Only if there is a multiple number of higher folders recognizable)  
1 While the Album View screen is displayed  
Press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].  
JPEG Menu  
CD(JPEG)  
JPEG Menu  
CD(JPEG)  
Picture (JPEG) View  
Folder  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Folder” and press [OK].  
Folder  
103__DVD  
F
1/3  
0001  
----  
----  
0002  
----  
----  
0003  
----  
0004  
----  
021216_0026  
103_DVD  
Select Folder  
104_DVD  
105_DVD  
Select folder to access.  
\DCIM  
----  
----  
Press OK to set.  
SELECT  
Page 001/001  
Previous  
Next  
OK  
OK  
RETURN  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
3 Press [2, 1] to select the higher folder and press [OK].  
RQT8906  
37  
Using on-screen menus/Status message  
Disc menu—Setting the disc content  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Soundtrack§  
DVD  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
The disc’s audio attributes appear.  
[DVD-V]  
Select the audio and language (below, Audio attribute,  
Language).  
DivX  
Select the soundtrack number.  
Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only  
one audio type.  
TV  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
2 3  
1
4 5 6  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
8 9  
0
7
DELETE  
-/--  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
Subtitle§  
[DVD-V]  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (below,  
Language).  
TIME SLIP  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only  
discs that contain subtitle on/off information)  
Turn the subtitle on/off.  
OK  
Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.  
DivX  
3,4,2,1  
OPTION  
RETURN  
OK  
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.  
Subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple  
subtitles.  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
DISPLAY  
F
Rec  
STATUS  
Angle§ [DVD-V]  
Change the number to select an angle.  
Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX  
(32, Changing audio during play)  
Source Select (DivX)  
Automatic: The constructing method of the DivX contents  
is automatically distinguished and output.  
Interlace: Select when the disc contents were recorded  
using interlace.  
Using on-screen menus  
Progressive: Select when the disc contents were recorded  
using progressive.  
Common procedures  
PBC (Playback control) (77) [VCD]  
1 Press [DISPLAY].  
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.  
Disc  
Î Digital 2/0 ch  
1
Soundtrack  
Subtitle  
Play  
Off  
§ With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using the  
menus (31) on the disc.  
Picture  
Sound  
Other  
L R  
Audio channel  
The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot  
change when there is no recording.  
Menu  
Item  
Setting  
Audio attribute  
Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,  
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you  
cannot select or change.  
LPCM/ÎDigital/DTS/MPEG:  
k (kHz):  
b (bit):  
Signal type  
Sampling frequency  
Number of bits  
ch (channel):  
Number of channels  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and  
Language  
press [1].  
ENG: English  
FRA: French  
DEU: German  
ITA: Italian  
ESP: Spanish  
NLD: Dutch  
DAN: Danish  
THA: Thai  
POR: Portuguese  
RUS: Russian  
JPN: Japanese  
CHI: Chinese  
KOR: Korean  
POL: Polish  
CES: Czech  
SLK: Slovak  
HUN: Hungarian  
FIN: Finnish  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and  
press [1].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.  
SVE: Swedish  
NOR: Norwegian  
MAL: Malay  
¢:  
Others  
Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].  
VIE: Vietnamese  
To clear the on-screen menus  
Press [DISPLAY].  
RQT8906  
38  
Play menu—Change the play sequence  
Sound menu—Change the sound effect  
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.  
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that  
can be selected will differ.  
V.S.S.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R][-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
(Dolby Digital, MPEG, 2-channel or over only)  
Repeat Play  
Enjoy a surround-like effect if you are using two front speakers  
only.  
Turn V.S.S. off if it causes distortion. (Check the surround  
function on the connected equipment.)  
V.S.S. does not work for bilingual recordings.  
All  
Chapter  
[CD][VCD]  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R][-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
MP3  
Group  
PL (Playlist)  
Title  
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
[CD][VCD] and MP3  
Dialog Enhancer  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R][-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
and DivX  
Track  
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)  
Select “Off” to cancel.  
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue  
easier to hear.  
Picture menu—Change the picture quality  
Other menu—Change the display position  
Playback NR  
Position  
Reduces noise and picture degradation.  
Progressive§ (77)  
1–5: The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu  
moves.  
Select “On” to enable progressive output.  
Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.  
Transfer§ [When “Progressive” (above) is set to “On”.]  
Status messages  
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit  
the type of title being played (77, Film and video).  
Press [STATUS].  
When the output signal is PAL  
(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)  
The display changes each time you press the button.  
Auto:  
Video:  
Film:  
Automatically detects the film and video  
content, and appropriately converts it.  
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is  
distorted.  
Select this if the edges of  
the film content appear  
Selected drive/type of disc  
HDD  
The remaining time appears here while  
REC  
PLAY  
stopped.  
Recording or play status/input channel  
STEREO  
L R  
TV audio type being received (below)  
Selected audio type  
jagged or rough when  
Recording drive/Copy progress indicator  
DVD REC  
“Auto” is selected.  
However, if the video  
content is distorted as  
shown in the illustration to the right, then select  
“Auto”.  
Title number and elapsed time during play/  
Recording mode  
Available recording time and  
recording mode  
Date and time  
When the output signal is NTSC  
Auto1  
(normal):  
Auto2:  
Automatically detects the film and video  
π
Remain  
18:53:50 11.10.  
13:50 XP  
content, and appropriately converts it.  
In addition to “Auto1”, automatically detects  
film contents with different frame rates and  
appropriately converts it.  
π T1 0:05.14 XP π T2 0:00.10 XP  
Title number and elapsed time during  
recording/Recording mode  
Video:  
Select when using “Auto1” and “Auto2”, and  
the content is distorted.  
AV-in NR (Only when AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV is selected)  
No display  
Reduces video tape noise while copying.  
TV audio type  
STEREO:STEREO stereo broadcast  
M 1/M 2: Bilingual dual-sound broadcast  
M 1: Monaural broadcast  
Automatic: Noise reduction only works on picture input from  
a video tape.  
On:  
Noise reduction works for input video.  
Noise reduction is off. You can record the input  
signal as it is.  
Off:  
§ Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup menu  
(20).  
RQT8906  
39  
Editing titles/chapters  
DVD  
TV  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Í
Í
1
2
During play or while stopped  
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
DRIVE SELECT  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
[EH67]  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
CH  
[HDD] [RAM]  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
Press the “Red” button to select  
“VIDEO”.  
8 9  
7
DELETE  
-/--  
0
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.  
:, 9  
;
1
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
HDD  
Title View  
Title View screen  
VIDEO  
PICTURE  
- - -  
007  
008  
TIME SLIP  
ARD 10.10. FRI  
- - -  
ARD 11.10. SAT  
- - -  
DIRECT  
- - -  
NAVIGATOR  
OK  
3,4,2,1  
The illustration shows the  
display of DMR-EH67.  
Previous  
Next  
Page 02/02  
OK  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
Select Previous  
Next  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
OPTION  
“Red”  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
MANUAL SKIP  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and  
press [OK].  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Multiple editing  
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)  
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.  
F
Rec  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
(You cannot edit finalised discs.)  
Title/Chapter  
Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting of one  
chapter.  
Title  
Chapter  
4
5
Press [OPTION].  
Press [3,  
4] to select the operation  
Start  
End  
and press [OK].  
[HDD] [RAM] You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each  
section between the division points becomes a chapter.  
(32, 41, Create Chapter)  
If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and  
press [OK]. (41)  
The illustration  
Title  
shows the display of  
DMR-EH67.  
Enter Name  
Set up Protection  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Cancel Protection  
Refer to “Title  
operations”  
(41).  
Partial Delete  
Change Thumbnail  
Divide Title  
Delete  
Properties  
Edit  
[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a  
playlist (42).  
Chapter View  
Table Display  
Album View  
The maximum number of items on a disc:  
[HDD]  
Switching the Direct Navigator  
appearance 30  
–Titles:  
–Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title  
(Depends on the state of recording.)  
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
500  
Playing still pictures 36, step 3  
If you select “Chapter View”  
–Titles:  
99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)  
–Chapters:  
Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254)  
(Depends on the state of recording.)  
6
Press [  
3
,
4
,
2
,
1
] to select the chapter.  
To start play Press [OK].  
[Note]  
To edit Step 7.  
Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot  
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.  
You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.  
Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.  
dividing a title etc).  
[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the  
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount  
of free space decreases.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View  
HDD  
Chapter View screen  
008 ARD 11.10. SAT  
001  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
0:31.24  
---  
To show other pages/Multiple editing (above)  
7
Press [OPTION], then [  
the operation and press [OK].  
3,  
4] to select  
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.  
Editing titles/chapters and playing  
chapters  
You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded  
programmes.  
Delete Chapter  
Create Chapter  
Refer to “Chapter  
operations” (41).  
Combine Chapters  
Title View  
Preparation  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit  
the connection to this unit.  
Turn the unit on.  
You can go back to Title View.  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded  
title to be edited.  
[RAM] Release protection (55).  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
RQT8906  
40  
Title operations  
After performing steps 1–5 (40)  
Delete§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.  
The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete titles.  
Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded  
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.  
Press [OK] to exit the screen.  
Properties  
Properties  
Dinosaur  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
No.  
026  
Time  
12:19  
Date 11.10.2006 MON Rec time 0:30 (SP)  
Name ARD  
You can give names to recorded titles.  
(58, Entering text)  
Enter Name  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
Set up Protection§  
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title V  
HDD  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.  
Cancel Protection§  
007  
008  
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
ARD 10.10. FRI  
ARD 11.10.  
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete  
HDD  
Partial Delete  
1Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the  
section you want to delete.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
008  
PLAY  
Start  
End  
(below, For your reference)  
Next  
Finish  
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].  
Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections.  
3Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
0:43.21  
Start  
End  
- -:- -.- -  
- -:- -.- -  
OK  
RETURN  
You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title  
View.  
1Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.  
2Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a  
Change Thumbnail  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail  
HDD  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
008  
Change  
(below, For your reference)  
Finish  
0:00.00  
thumbnail is shown.  
To change the thumbnail  
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at  
the point you want to change.  
Start play and select the image  
Change  
of a thumbnail.  
- -:- -.- -  
ENTER  
3Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].  
You can divide a title into two.  
Divide Title  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
HDD  
Divide Title  
1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.  
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].  
3Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].  
[HDD] [RAM]  
008  
PLAY  
Preview  
Divide  
(below, For your reference)  
Finish  
0:43.21  
To confirm the division point  
Divide  
- -:- -.- -  
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays 10  
seconds before and after the division point.)  
To change the division point  
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide the  
title.  
[Note]  
The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (77) of the original title.  
Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.  
§ Multiple editing is possible.  
Chapter operations  
After performing steps 1–7 (40)  
Delete Chapter§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.  
Select “Combine Chapters” (below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.  
(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the  
title.  
Create Chapter  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter  
HDD  
[HDD] [RAM]  
008  
PLAY  
1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.  
Repeat this step to divide at other points.  
Create  
Finish  
(below, For your reference)  
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].  
0:43.21  
Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [OK].  
The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.  
Combine Chapters  
[HDD] [RAM]  
§ Multiple editing is possible.  
For your reference  
Use search (31), Time Slip (32) to find the desired point.  
To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (32) and Frame-by-frame (32).  
To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).  
RQT8906  
41  
Creating, editing and playing playlists  
DVD  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and  
TV  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
CH  
press [OK].  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
DRIVE SELECT  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”  
2 3  
1
and press [OK].  
4 5 6  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
Playlists  
HDD  
- -  
Playlist View  
8 9  
0
7
- -  
- -  
DELETE  
-/--  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
Create  
- -  
- -  
- -  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title  
TIME SLIP  
EXIT  
and press [4].  
Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then skip to  
step 7.  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
Create  
Playlists  
HDD  
OPTION  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
001 ARD 11.10. SAT  
OPTION  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
Source Title  
001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
DISPLAY  
MANUAL SKIP  
002  
002  
---  
---  
Source Chapter  
001  
003  
---  
---  
Chapters in Playlist  
---  
You can arrange the chapters (40) to create a playlist.  
---  
---  
Title  
Title  
OK  
OPTION  
Press RETURN to finish.  
RETURN  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
6 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you  
want to add to a playlist and press  
Playlist  
Chapter  
Chapter  
[OK].  
Press [3] to cancel.  
Create  
Playlists  
HDD  
001 ARD 11.10. SAT  
Copying (47) a playlist will create a title.  
Source Title  
001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
002  
002  
---  
---  
Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much  
capacity.  
Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles  
and source chapters.  
You cannot create or edit playlists while recording or copying.  
Source Chapter  
001  
003  
---  
---  
Chapters in Playlist  
---  
---  
---  
OK  
OPTION  
Press RETURN to finish.  
RETURN  
[HDD] [RAM]  
You can also create a new chapter from the source title.  
Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter” and press [OK]  
(41, Create Chapter).  
The maximum number of items on a disc:  
–Playlists:  
99  
–Chapters in playlists: Approx. 1000  
(Depends on the state of recording.)  
7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to  
If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the  
items entered will not be recorded.  
insert the chapter and press [OK].  
Playlists  
HDD  
Create  
Creating playlists  
[HDD] [RAM]  
001 ARD 11.10. SAT  
Source Title  
001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
002  
002  
---  
---  
Source Chapter  
001  
Preparation  
003  
---  
---  
---  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate Video input to suit  
the connection to this unit.  
Chapters in Playlist  
---  
---  
Turn the unit on.  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded  
title to be edited.  
[RAM] Release protection (55).  
You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while  
copying.  
Playlists must be made in accordance with the encoding system  
currently selected in “TV System” (66).  
OK  
Press RETURN to finish.  
RETURN  
Press [3] to select other source titles.  
Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.  
8 Press [RETURN].  
All the selected scenes become the playlist.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
To exit the screen  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
Press [EXIT].  
and press [OK].  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
FUNCTION MENU  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
G-Code Record  
Playback  
Recording  
Advanced Copy  
Playlists  
Delete  
Copy  
Flexible Rec  
DV Auto Rec  
To Others  
OK  
Setup  
HDD Management  
RETURN  
RQT8906  
42  
Editing and playing playlists/chapters  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Playlist operations  
After performing steps 1–5 (left)  
[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)  
Delete§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press  
[OK].  
Once deleted, the playlists are lost and  
cannot be restored.  
Make certain before proceeding.  
1
While stopped  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
Playlist information (e.g., total time and date)  
is shown.  
Press [OK] to exit the screen.  
and press [OK].  
Properties  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[-RW‹VR›]  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and  
Properties  
press [OK].  
Dinosaur  
No.  
10  
Date 12.10.2006 TUE  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
Chapters 002 Total 0:30.53  
playlist.  
RETURN  
OK  
To start play Press [OK].  
To edit Step 5.  
(42, Creating playlists, Step 5–8)  
Create  
Playlists  
HDD  
01  
Playlist View  
- -  
Playlist View screen  
[HDD] [RAM]  
- -  
Copy§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press  
[OK].  
The copied playlist becomes the newest  
one in the playlist view screen.  
12.10. SUN 0:30  
- -  
Create  
- -  
- -  
[HDD] [RAM]  
To show other pages/Multiple editing (40)  
5 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select  
the operation and press [OK].  
You can give names to playlists.  
(58, Entering text)  
Enter  
Name  
[HDD] [RAM]  
If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and  
press [OK].  
(41, Change Thumbnail)  
Change  
Create  
Thumbnail  
Copy  
Refer to “Playlist  
operations”.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Enter Name  
Delete  
Change Thumbnail  
Properties  
§ Multiple editing is possible.  
Edit  
Chapter View  
Chapter operations  
[HDD] [RAM]  
After performing steps 1–7 (left)  
Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and  
source chapters.  
If you select “Chapter View”  
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
(42, Creating playlists, Step 5–7)  
Add  
chapter.  
Chapter  
To start play Press [OK].  
To edit Step 7.  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position  
to insert the chapter and press [OK].  
Move  
Chapter  
Chapter View screen  
Playlists  
HDD  
Chapter View  
01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30  
Playlists  
HDD  
Move Chapter  
001  
002  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
0:10.24  
0:19.36  
01 12.10. SUN 0:11  
002  
---  
---  
001  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
0:10.24  
0:19.36  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
To show other pages/Multiple editing (40)  
7 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select  
the operation and press [OK].  
Add Chapter  
Previous  
Page 01/01  
Next  
OK  
RETURN  
(41, Create Chapter)  
Create  
Chapter  
Move Chapter  
Refer to “Chapter  
operations”.  
Create Chapter  
Combine Chapters  
Delete Chapter  
(41, Combine Chapters)  
Combine  
Chapters  
Playlist View  
(41, Delete Chapter)  
The playlist itself is deleted if you delete all  
the chapters in it.  
You can go back to Playlist View.  
Delete  
Chapter§  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
§ Multiple editing is possible.  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT8906  
43  
Editing still pictures [EH67]  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
2
[HDD] [RAM]  
Press the “Green” button to select  
“PICTURE”.  
DVD  
TV  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
3
Editing an album:  
DRIVE SELECT  
Select the album to be edited and press  
2 3  
1
[OPTION].  
4 5 6  
When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,  
press [OPTION] without selecting album.  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
8 9  
7
DELETE  
-/--  
0
Editing a still picture:  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
1 Select the album which contains the still  
picture to edit and press [OK].  
2 Select the still pictures to edit and press  
[OPTION].  
:, 9  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
;
TIME SLIP  
DIRECT  
NAVIGATOR  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and  
press [OK].  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Multiple editing  
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)  
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.  
OK  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
OPTION  
“Green”  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
F
Rec  
To switch to another higher folder (37)  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation  
and press [OK].  
To edit the album  
(e.g., [SD])  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
Useful functions during still picture  
play (37)  
You can edit pictures and albums.  
You can use SD Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 4 GB (7).  
You cannot edit still pictures recorded on CD-R/CD-RW.  
Start Slide Show  
Slide Show Setting  
Add Pictures  
Create Album  
Edit Album  
Enter Album Name  
Delete Album  
Set up Protection  
Cancel Protection  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.  
[RAM] [SD] Release protection (55, Setting the protection).  
Select Folder  
Album and picture operation (45)  
[RAM] [SD]  
This is only displayed when there are other higher  
folders that can be viewed.  
To switch to another higher folder (37)  
To edit still picture  
(e.g., [SD])  
Delete Picture  
Album and picture operation (45)  
Set up Protection  
Cancel Protection  
You can go back to Album View.  
Album View  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
RQT8906  
44  
Album and picture operation  
After performing steps 1–4, page 44  
Delete Picture§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
Delete Album§  
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before  
proceeding.  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
When deleting an album, files other than the still picture files inside the album will also be deleted. (This  
does not apply to folders under the album concerned.)  
67]  
[EH  
You can give names to albums.  
(58, Entering text)  
Album names input using this unit may not be displayed on other equipment.  
Enter Album Name  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
Set up Protection§  
Cancel Protection§  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
If set, this will protect the still picture or album from accidental deletion.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
SD CARD  
Pic  
103__  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
Album Name  
The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected.  
Even if the protection setting is used by this unit to protect an album, the album  
may be deleted by another unit.  
0001  
0002  
0006  
0005  
1Press [2, 1] to select “Start” or “Yes” and press [OK].  
Add Pictures  
Create Album  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
2
3
4
e.g.,  
1
Create Album  
HDD  
Step  
Please select album to copy.  
- - -  
007  
008  
12. 5.06 Total 24  
100_DVD  
- - -  
12. 6.06 Total 3  
101_DVD  
- - -  
- - -  
Previous  
Page 02/02  
Next  
OK  
Previous  
Next  
RETURN  
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album that contains the still picture you want  
to add and press [OK].  
Create Album  
e.g.,  
Which pictures to copy from the selected album?  
Select pictures to copy  
Copy all pictures  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
[RAM] [SD]  
To switch to another higher folder  
1 Press [OPTION].  
2 Select “Select Folder” and press [OK].  
3 Press [2, 1] to select the higher folder and press [OK].  
3Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
If “Select pictures to copy” is selected  
Select the still picture you want to add and press [OK].  
If “Copy all pictures” is selected  
All the still pictures in the album will be copied.  
4Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [OK].  
If you want to continue copying, select “Yes” and go to step .  
Only for “Create Album”  
5Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [OK].  
If “Yes” is selected:  
You can give names to albums. (58, Entering text)  
If “No” is selected:  
The recording date of the first picture in the album becomes the album name. (If there is no recording  
date information, the date will appear as [--.--.----].)  
Press [2] to select “Start” and press [OK].  
You cannot copy if multiple albums are selected.  
Copy to DVD-RAM  
[HDD]  
Copy to HDD  
[RAM]  
§ Multiple editing is possible.  
[Note]  
Timer recordings do not start when performing “Add Pictures”, “Create Album”, “Copy to DVD-RAM” or “Copy to HDD”.  
You cannot perform “Add Pictures” or “Create Album” to a higher folder.  
RQT8906  
45  
Delete Navigator  
Instructions/notes regarding SD Cards and SD Drive are  
applicable to the DMR-EH67 model only.  
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
DVD  
TV  
Í
Í
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and  
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
press [OK].  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
DELETE Navigator  
HDD  
Title View  
The illustration shows the  
display of DMR-EH67.  
VIDEO  
PICTURE  
2 3  
1
- - -  
- - -  
007  
008  
4 5 6  
ARD 10.10. FRI  
- - -  
ARD 11.10. SAT  
- - -  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
8 9  
0
7
DELETE  
-/--  
DELETE  
¢
Previous  
Page 02/02  
Next  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
OK  
Select  
OPTION  
Previous  
Next  
RETURN  
:, 9  
[EH67]  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
;
[HDD] [RAM] To switch to the other view  
Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.  
Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.  
TIME SLIP  
EXIT  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
3
If you want to delete a title:  
3,4,2,1  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
OPTION  
RETURN  
OK  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
title and press [OK].  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
“Red”  
F
Rec  
If you want to delete an album:  
“Green”  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
album and press [DELETE ¢].  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
[SD] ([EH67])  
(You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)  
[EH57] :Still pictures cannot be deleted.  
If you want to delete a still picture:  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album  
that contains the still picture you want to  
delete and press [OK].  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still  
picture and press [OK].  
A title or a picture cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make  
certain before proceeding.  
You cannot delete while recording or copying.  
Preparation  
You can confirm the titles or pictures etc. that you have  
selected using the option menu.  
Refer to option menu operations for the “Title View” (40,  
step 5).  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.  
[RAM] [SD] Release protection (55, Setting the protection).  
Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View” (44,  
step 4).  
Available disc space after deleting  
Refer to option menu operations for the “Picture (JPEG)  
View” (44, step 4).  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] If you delete a recorded title (or a still picture),  
the space deleted becomes available for recording.  
To show other pages  
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Available disc space increases after  
deleting any of these titles or still  
pictures  
Multiple deleting  
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)  
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.  
Available  
disc space  
......  
Last title  
recorded  
Title  
Title  
4 Press [2] to select “Delete” and press  
[OK].  
[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the  
last recorded title is deleted.  
The title, album or the picture is deleted.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
Available disc space does  
Available disc space  
not increase even after  
increases after deleting  
deleting  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
Last title  
recorded  
Available  
disc space  
......  
Title  
Title  
Deleting titles or pictures during play  
1
While playing  
[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even  
after the contents are deleted.  
Press [DELETE ¢].  
You cannot delete a picture during a Slide Show.  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and  
press [OK].  
The title or the picture is deleted.  
RQT8906  
46  
Copying titles or playlists  
Copy  
Advanced Copy  
Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult Make a copy list and then copy.  
Features  
You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists in the  
settings.  
way you want.  
HDD DVD  
Copy direction  
DVD HDD  
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]  
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)  
[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed copy with  
finalised discs.  
[+RW] You cannot perform high-speed copy from  
+RW to HDD.  
High speed mode copy§1  
§2  
Changing recording mode  
Finalise§3  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
Automatically finalised  
Can be selected  
High speed mode  
Normal speed mode  
High speed mode  
Normal speed mode  
Copying SD Video from an SD Card  
([EH67]) (51)  
[HDD] [RAM] only  
Copying playlists§4  
§5  
§5  
Are chapters maintained?  
Are thumbnails maintained?  
Recording and Playing while Copying  
§6  
§7  
§6  
§8  
§1 To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD  
(The default setting is “On”. 61).  
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.  
When arranging multiple titles for copying, if any titles are recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”, then you cannot perform with  
high-speed copy.  
Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode.  
Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.).  
Titles that contain many deleted segments.  
[EH67] SD Video titles copied to the HDD from an SD Card.  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode. (Displayed  
)
§2 If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent  
against degradation of picture quality.)  
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
§3 You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.  
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (  
§4 You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.  
57).  
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.  
§5 [RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minutes [+R] about 8-minutes) when finalising after copying the disc.  
§6 Thumbnails return to the default position.  
§7 When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.  
§8 Possible only with titles on the HDD  
[However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation or when copying SD Video from an SD Card ([EH67]).]  
You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.  
You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (8).  
–Still pictures cannot be played.  
Approximate copying times (Max. speed)  
(excludes time required to write data management information)  
5X Speed  
DVD-RAM  
12X Speed  
DVD-R§1  
4X Speed  
4X Speed  
8X Speed  
+R§4  
4X Speed  
+R DL§2  
4X Speed  
+RW  
HDD  
DVD-R DL§2  
DVD-RW§3  
Recording  
Required  
Required  
Required  
Required  
Required  
Required  
Required  
Recorded  
Speed  
Speed  
Speed  
Speed  
Speed  
Speed  
Speed  
Mode  
XP  
time  
12 min.  
6 min.  
3 min.  
2 min.  
time  
time  
time  
time  
time  
time  
5
x
5 min. 46 s. 10  
2 min. 30 s. 24  
1 min. 21 s. 44  
58 sec. 62  
48 sec. 75  
x
x
x
x
x
15 min.  
7 min. 30 s.  
4
8
x
x
15 min.  
7 min. 30 s.  
4
8
x
x
8 min. 20 s.  
7
x
15 min.  
7 min. 30 s.  
4
8
x
x
15 min.  
7 min. 30 s.  
4
8
x
x
1
SP  
LP  
EP (6H)  
EP (8H)  
10  
20  
30  
x
x
x
x
3 min. 45 s. 16  
1 min. 53 s. 32  
x
x
1 hour  
3 min. 45 s. 16  
2 min. 30 s. 24  
1 min. 53 s. 32  
x
x
x
3 min. 45 s. 16  
2 min. 30 s. 24  
1 min. 57 s. 31  
x
x
x
3 min. 45 s. 16  
x
3 min. 45 s. 16x  
1 min. 30 s. 40  
The above values indicate the quickest possible times and speeds to high speed copy a one hour title recorded on the HDD to a high speed  
recording compatible disc. Depending on what part of the disc is being written to, the features of the disc, etc., the times and speeds will vary.  
§1 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc.  
§2 In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL.  
§3 In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.  
§4 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.  
[Note]  
When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.  
Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.  
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and  
+R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)  
Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow “One time  
only recording”  
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at  
normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed to DVD-R DL and  
+R DL. The titles that were temporarily copied to the HDD are then deleted.  
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.  
–When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When  
copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when  
copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP  
mode is needed on the HDD.)  
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (77) compatible DVD-  
RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.  
Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the HDD.  
Titles will not be copied if they are protected (41).  
You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only recording”  
titles.  
Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be registered  
on the same copying list.  
–When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles  
to be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 500 in total.  
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may  
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (5)  
RQT8906  
47  
Copying titles or playlists  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
DVD  
TV  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
CH  
press [OK].  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
COPY Navigator  
HDD  
Destination Capacity: 4310MB  
Size: 0MB( 0%)  
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title  
Total  
:
0
2 3  
001  
002  
003  
004  
1
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30  
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15  
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00  
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05  
Numbered  
buttons  
4 5 6  
Rec time  
0:52(SP)  
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10  
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25  
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30  
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00  
---  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
8 9  
0
7
DELETE  
Page 01/01  
-/--  
OK  
Select  
OPTION  
RETURN  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
:, 9  
;
1
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title you  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
want to copy and press [OK].  
TIME SLIP  
To show other pages  
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
3,4,2,1  
Multiple editing  
OK  
Select with [3, 4] and press [;]. (Repeat.)  
Press [OK] to register.  
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
STATUS  
OPTION  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
“Red”  
“Green”  
F
Rec  
4
After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-  
Video format), +R and +R DL discs, they become play-  
only and you can no longer record or edit.  
Before copying  
When copying a title with main and secondary audio  
Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from  
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (62) when:  
–Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),  
+R, +R DL and +RW.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
press [OK].  
Copy starts.  
–When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (62)  
and you are copying in XP mode.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
Speed and recording mode when copying  
To stop copying (50)  
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] : High speed  
[HDD]  
>
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following table.  
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and  
Rec for High Speed Copy (61)  
Copy speed  
functions (50)  
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High  
Speed Copy” set to “On”. §  
High speed  
To check the properties of a title and sort COPY  
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High  
Speed Copy” set to “Off”.  
Navigator  
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press  
Normal speed  
When making a copy of multiple titles that  
were recorded with “Rec for High Speed  
Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.  
[OPTION].  
COPY Navigator  
HDD  
Destination Capacity: 4310MB  
Size: 0MB( 0%)  
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title  
Total  
:
0
§ In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to  
“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in “EP”  
001  
002  
003  
004  
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30  
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15  
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00  
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05  
Rec time  
0:52(SP)  
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10  
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25  
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30  
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00  
---  
or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
Page 01/01  
Properties  
Sort  
When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.  
When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for  
Recording” do not match.  
When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
OK  
RETURN  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”  
and press [OK].  
Properties:  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR  
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are  
shown.  
[Note]  
Sort:  
Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding system (PAL  
or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot  
be copied.  
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to  
display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start  
time and title name. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)  
If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is  
cancelled.  
Preparation  
Insert a disc that you can use for copying (4, 5).  
Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.  
Copy  
[Note]  
When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording  
compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the  
sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.  
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in  
“DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (61).  
If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title  
at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.  
To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and  
then copy the contents of the list (49).  
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL  
are automatically finalised (77). After finalising, the discs  
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD  
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.  
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)  
When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set to FR.  
(However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode,  
copy will not be performed.)  
RQT8906  
48  
6 Register titles and playlists for copy.  
Copying using the copying list–  
Advanced Copy  
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]  
[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]  
If you are going to copy a registered list without making any  
changes to it (step 7).  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].  
Copy  
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
[SD] > [HDD] [RAM]  
Cancel All  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
( 0%)  
0MB  
Size:  
Name of item  
New item (Total=0)  
1
2
3
Copy Direction  
HDD ꢀꢁDVD  
No. Size  
You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.  
Copy Mode  
VIDEO High Speed  
Create List  
See also “Before copying” (48).  
Page 01/01  
Create copy list.  
Start Copying  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
1
While stopped  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].  
3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the  
“Green” button to select “Playlists”.  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
Create List  
HDD  
VIDEO Playlists  
and press [OK].  
- - -  
007  
008  
0:30(XP)  
ARD 10.10. FRI  
- - -  
ARD 11.10. SAT  
- - -  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced  
- - -  
Copy” and press [OK].  
Previous  
Page 02/02  
Next  
Previous  
Copy  
OK  
Select  
OPTION  
Next  
RETURN  
Cancel All  
Source  
HDD  
DVD  
1 Copy Direction  
HDD ꢀꢁDVD  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the titles or playlists and  
press [OK].  
Destination  
Copy Mode  
2
VIDEO High Speed  
When copying to a disc using high speed mode,  
0
Create List  
3
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “  
” can be registered.  
” or  
Select the copy direction.  
Start Copying  
OK  
RETURN  
If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]  
several times (step 7).  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “  
be registered.  
” can  
To select a multiple number of items together, press  
[;] to add the check mark and press [OK]  
(below, Multiple editing).  
To show other pages (below)  
To edit the copying list (50)  
4 Set the copy direction.  
If you are not going to change the copying direction, press  
[4] (step 5).  
1Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].  
2Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].  
3Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].  
[EH57] If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically  
set to “DVD”, or vice versa. (Go to step 6)  
4 [EH67] Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press  
[OK].  
You can register a multiple number of titles and  
playlists on the copying list by repeating  
steps 24.  
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size”  
(50) exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not  
sufficient).  
5 [EH67] Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].  
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.  
6Press [2] to confirm.  
5 Press [2] to confirm.  
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start  
5 Set the recording mode.  
Copying” and press [OK].  
When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed  
recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or  
+RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than  
normal.  
If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]  
(step 6).  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].  
2 [EH67] Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK]  
[EH57] “Format” is automatically set to “VIDEO”. (Go to  
step 4)  
.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal  
(Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup  
menu (61).  
3 [EH67] Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].  
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press  
[OK]  
Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK]  
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
.
press [OK] to start copying.  
5
.
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
6 Press [2] to confirm.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or  
“Copy Only” and press [OK].  
If “Copy & Finalise” is selected  
After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also  
play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no  
longer record or edit.  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press  
[OK].  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Multiple editing  
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)  
Press [OK] to register to the list.  
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.  
When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab, the  
check mark is cancelled.  
RQT8906  
(continued on the next page)  
49  
Copying titles or playlists  
(Continued)  
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and  
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after  
copy.  
Refer to the control reference on page 48.  
To stop copying  
To edit the copying list  
Delete All  
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.  
(You cannot stop while finalising)  
Select the item in step 6–4 (49, right column)  
Add  
1
2
Press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press  
When High-speed copying  
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are  
copied.  
Delete  
Move  
[OK].  
Delete All:  
When Normal Speed copying  
Copies until the point cancelled. However titles with “One time only  
recording” restriction, only titles that have completely copied at the  
point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are cancelled  
before the copy is complete are not copied and remain on the HDD.  
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while  
temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied.  
However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to  
disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the  
point canceled are copied.  
Delete all items registered on the copying list.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
Add:  
Add new items to the copying list.  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the playlists and titles to be added and  
press [OK].  
Delete:  
Delete the selected items.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
You can also delete multiple items (49, Multiple editing).  
Move:  
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.  
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].  
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-  
RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of  
remaining writable disc space becomes less.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists  
After performing steps 1–3 (49, left column)  
Recording and playing while copying  
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed  
copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalising)  
Still pictures cannot be played.  
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.  
–When a title, still picture ([EH67]), etc. has been recorded or  
deleted at the copy source  
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.  
To confirm the current progress  
Press [STATUS].  
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,  
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.  
[Note]  
Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the  
HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.  
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)  
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions  
COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators  
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high  
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW  
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high  
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)  
(However, titles and playlists cannot be copied in  
high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)  
[+R]DL]  
is displayed, but copy cannot be  
performed.  
Title with “One time only recording” restriction  
(8, When recording the “One time only  
recording” broadcasts)  
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only  
recording” restriction after copying.  
(8, When recording the “One time only  
recording” broadcasts)  
Title or playlist contains still picture(s)  
Still picture(s) cannot be copied.  
Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding  
system from that of the TV system currently  
selected on the unit.  
(NTSC)  
(PAL)  
Titles and playlists displaying these marks  
cannot be selected.  
Data size of each registered item  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
Size:  
Size:  
0MB (0%)  
No. Size  
Name of item  
Data size recorded to the copy  
destination  
New item (Total=0)  
When copying at normal speed, the  
total data size will change according to  
the recording mode.  
Page 01/01  
Create copy list.  
The total data size shown may be  
larger than the sum of the data sizes  
for each registered item, because of  
data management information being  
written to the copy destination, etc.  
RQT8906  
50  
8
When the top menu is displayed  
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title  
you want to start copying, and press  
[OK].  
+R DL  
[DVD-V] > [HDD]  
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW  
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.  
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD  
according to the set time.  
My favorite  
01/02  
01  
Chapter  
02  
Chapter  
1
2
03  
Chapter  
04  
Chapter  
3
4
05  
06  
If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that  
portion of title is not recorded.  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (61) is set to “On” and you  
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected  
in “Aspect for Recording” (61) of the Setup menu.  
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are  
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has  
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is  
reached.)  
To return to the previous screen  
Operations and on screen displays during copy are also  
recorded.  
Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent  
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.  
Press [RETURN].  
To stop copying  
Press [].  
You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to stop  
copying.  
If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.  
The following cannot be copied: Video CD, Audio CD and so on.  
Preparation  
Insert the finalised disc (30).  
[Note]  
The screen saver on the right is recorded at the  
beginning.  
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-  
Video”) (49, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)  
The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of  
copy to the end.  
If play does not begin automatically or if the top  
menu does not display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.  
Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original  
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.  
If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD Video  
Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (49, Copying  
using the copying list–Advanced Copy).  
6 Set “Copy Time”.  
If you are not going to change the setting (step 7).  
Setting the unit to copy according to the set  
time  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].  
Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc  
3Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK].  
4Press [2] to confirm.  
Copying SD Video from an SD Card  
[EH67]  
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been  
taken by a Panasonic SD Video Camera, digital video camera etc,  
can be stored on HDD or DVD-RAM.  
Copy will continue until there is not enough available  
recording space on the HDD.  
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)  
You cannot playback SD Video on an SD Card with this unit.  
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.  
You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.  
This unit cannot copy AVCHD format motion pictures from an SD  
Card.  
Setting the copying time  
3Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK].  
4Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].  
Copy  
Cancel All  
1 Copy Direction  
DVD ꢀꢁHDD  
2
Hour  
00 Min.  
SD Video  
Copy Mode  
2
3
DVD-Video XP  
VIDEO§  
Set the time a few minutes  
longer.  
Copy Time  
Press OK to change the setting.  
Start Copying  
OK  
HDD  
RETURN  
DVD-RAM  
5Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4]  
to set the recording time.  
6Press [OK].  
§ Conventionally recorded programmes  
7Press [2] to confirm.  
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after  
the content being played finishes.  
The display below automatically appears when you insert a card  
into the SD Card slot while stopped.  
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)” and press [OK].  
Then go to step 7 on page 49.  
Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to  
include the operation time before play begins.  
You can also set the recording time with the numbered  
buttons.  
SD Card  
Album View  
Copy Pictures (JPEG)  
Copy Video (MPEG2)  
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
Copying” and press [OK].  
How to copy  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK] to start copying.  
The disc top menu is displayed.  
Refer to “Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy” (49)  
Please set the items in step 4 and 5 as shown below.  
Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is  
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising  
the disc (57).  
Copy Direction:  
Source : SD CARD  
Copy Mode:  
Format : VIDEO  
SD Video on an SD Card are automatically registered on the  
copy list.  
If there are no SD Video on an SD Card, “Copy Video  
(MPEG2)” is not displayed.  
RQT8906  
51  
Copying still pictures [EH67]  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
6 Register still pictures for copy.  
If you are going to copy a registered list without making any  
DVD  
TV  
changes to it (step 7).  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
You can register still pictures or still picture folders.  
Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same  
list.  
SELECT  
AV  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
Numbered  
buttons  
Copy  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
Cancel All  
Picture  
Picture/Folder  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
1 Copy Direction  
No. Size  
Name of item  
New item (Total=0)  
8 9  
7
SD CARD ꢀꢁHDD  
DELETE  
Copy Mode  
PICTURE High Speed  
2
-/--  
0
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
Create List  
3
:, 9  
Page 01/01  
Create copy list.  
Start Copying  
OK  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
;
OPTION  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
To register individual still pictures  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press  
[OK].  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
OPTION  
OPTION  
RETURN  
To select a multiple number of items together, press  
[;] to add the check mark and press [OK] (53,  
Multiple editing).  
To show other pages (53)  
To select the still pictures in another folder (53)  
To edit the copying list (53)  
RETURN  
CREATE  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
You can use SD Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 4 GB (7).  
SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be  
used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment.  
SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only  
compatible with SD Memory Cards.  
You can register a multiple number of still pictures on  
the copying list by repeating steps 23.  
You cannot copy pictures recorded to CD-R/CD-RW.  
[SD]  
4 Press [2] to confirm.  
While stopped put the card in the slot, and the menu (below) is  
automatically displayed.  
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures (JPEG)”, press [OK] and then  
go to step 4 on page 53, “Copying all the still pictures on a card—  
Copy All Pictures”.  
To register on a folder by folder basis  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].  
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [OK].  
SD Card  
Copy  
Album View  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
Copy Pictures (JPEG)  
Copy Video (MPEG2)  
Cancel All  
Picture  
Picture/Folder  
1 Copy Direction  
No. Size  
Name of item  
SD CARD > HDD  
New item (Total=0)  
Copy Mode  
2
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].  
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].  
Press [RETURN] to exit the screen.  
Copying using the copying list  
To select a multiple number of items together, press  
[;] to add the check mark and press [OK] (53,  
Multiple editing).  
To show other pages (53)  
To switch to another higher folder (53)  
To edit the copying list (53)  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
and press [OK].  
You can register a multiple number of folders on the  
copying list by repeating steps 45.  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced  
Copy” and press [OK].  
6 Press [2] to confirm.  
Copy  
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start  
Cancel All  
Source  
SD CARD  
HDD  
1 Copy Direction  
SD CARD > HDD  
Copying” and press [OK].  
For individual still pictures only  
Destination  
Copy Mode  
PICTURE High Speed  
2
0
Create List  
3
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,  
select “Folder”.  
If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]  
several times (step 7).  
Folder  
New folder  
001 100__DVD  
002 101__DVD  
003 102__DVD  
4 Set the copy direction.  
---  
New folder  
---  
If you are not going to change the copying direction, press  
[4] (step 5).  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press  
[1].  
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
press [OK] to start copying.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].  
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].  
To stop copying  
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.  
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].  
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.  
6 Press [2] to confirm.  
To return to the previous screen  
5 Set the recording mode.  
Press [RETURN].  
If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]  
(step 6).  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].  
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].  
RQT8906  
Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK]  
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.  
4 Press [2] to confirm.  
.
52  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press  
[OK].  
Copying all the still pictures on a card—  
Copy All Pictures  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
[SD] > [HDD] or [RAM]  
Multiple editing  
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)  
Press [OK] to register to the list.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the SD drive.  
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.  
67]  
1
While stopped  
[EH  
To edit the copying list  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
Select the item in step 6–3(for a still picture) or 6–5  
Delete All  
(for a folder) (52, right column)  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
Add  
1
2
Press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press  
and press [OK].  
Delete  
[OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy All  
Pictures” and press [OK].  
Copy All Pictures  
Delete All:  
Delete all items registered on the copying list.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
Add:  
Copy from  
SD CARD  
Add new items to the copying list.  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder to be added  
and press [OK].  
Copy to  
HDD  
Delete:  
Delete the selected items.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
You can also delete multiple items (above, Multiple editing).  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to” and  
press [2, 1] to select the drive.  
5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy”  
and press [OK].  
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists  
After performing steps 1–3 (52)  
To stop copying  
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.  
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.  
–When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the  
copy source  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,  
remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.  
To select another folder  
(7, Structure of folders displayed by this unit [EH67])  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].  
If you want to switch to another higher folder (below).  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].  
Create List  
SD CARD  
Create List  
SD CARD  
Picture (JPEG)  
Folder  
Folder  
103__DVD  
\DCIM\100__DVD  
0001  
----  
----  
0002  
----  
----  
0003  
----  
0004  
----  
001 100__DVD  
002 101__DVD  
003 102__DVD  
004 103__DVD  
---  
---  
---  
---  
----  
----  
Page 01/01  
Picture 0012 File 0012  
Page 001/001  
Previous  
Next  
OK  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
15:  
115:  
[0] [0] [5]  
[0] [1] [5]  
[1] [1] [5]  
[Note]  
When copying the still pictures on a folder by folder basis  
(52) or card by card basis (above, Copy All Pictures), files  
other than the still picture files inside the folder will also be  
copied. (This does not apply to the lower folders contained  
inside the folders.)  
If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination  
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing  
still pictures.  
If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of  
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (33), copying  
will stop partway through.  
When a name has not been input for the copy source folder, the  
folder’s name may be changed from the source folder. It is  
recommended that you input a folder name before copying  
(45, Enter Album Name).  
The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the  
same list.  
To switch to another higher folder  
Only when selecting the source folder  
If there is a multiple number of higher  
\DCIM\100__DVD  
folders recognizable, while the screen on  
the right appears  
001 100__DVD  
002 101__DVD  
003 102__DVD  
004 103__DVD  
1 Press [OPTION] and press [OK].  
2 Press [2, 1] to select the higher  
Select Folder  
folder and press [OK].  
You cannot register a folder with a  
different higher folder to the same  
Select folder to access.  
\DCIM  
Press OK to set.  
SELECT  
list.  
RETURN  
OK  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the desired  
folder and press [OK].  
You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.  
The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the  
copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.  
RQT8906  
53  
Copying from a video cassette recorder  
Í
Í
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
VOL  
CH  
2 Start play on the other equipment.  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
DRIVE SELECT  
3
When you want to start recording  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
CH  
Press [¥ REC].  
Recording starts.  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
8 9  
7
INPUT SELECT  
DELETE  
To skip unwanted parts  
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)  
-/--  
0
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
To stop recording  
Press [].  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
;
Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated  
to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so  
treated cannot be recorded using this unit.  
TIME SLIP  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
Using Flexible Recording (25), you can record the content of a  
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best  
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.  
OK  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec)  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
REC MODE  
F
Rec  
¥ REC  
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front  
[HDD] [RAM] When the “DV Auto Rec” function is used, programmes  
are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are created at  
each break in the images and the playlist is created automatically.  
You can also connect to the AV4 input terminals on the rear.  
Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.  
Preparation  
1
Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the  
equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (left column).  
Turn on the main unit and DV equipment.  
Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.  
Pause play of the DV equipment at the point you want recording  
to start.  
REC  
OPEN/CLOSE  
2
3
4
This unit  
DV IN  
VIDEO  
L/MONO - AUDIO- R  
S VIDEO  
AV3 IN  
When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,  
Yellow White Red  
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (66).  
After preparation is completed, the following screen appears.  
DV Auto Rec  
DV cable  
(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)  
Press [2, 1] to select “Rec to  
HDD” or “Rec to DVD” and press  
[OK].  
DV unit is connected.  
Record from the DV unit?  
S Video  
cable§  
Audio/Video  
cable  
Other video equipment  
Rec to HDD  
Rec to DVD  
Cancel  
You can proceed to step 4.  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.  
When the screen is not displayed, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select  
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural  
Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.  
§ The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the  
VIDEO terminal.  
HDD or DVD and then continue from step 1.  
1
While stopped  
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal  
Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”  
in the Setup menu (62).  
When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder),  
you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape only.  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (61) is set to “On” and you  
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected  
in “Aspect for Recording” (61) of the Setup menu.  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “DV Auto Rec”  
and press [OK].  
About the aspect when recording a programme (8)  
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec” and  
[Note]  
If it becomes time for a timer recording to start while copying, the  
recording will start and the copying will stop.  
press [OK].  
Recording starts.  
Manual recording  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
Preparation  
When recording finishes  
The confirmation screen appears. Press [OK] to finish DV automatic  
recording.  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.  
When recording bilingual programmes (8, Important notes for  
recording)  
When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,  
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (66).  
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have  
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can  
be recorded onto the HDD.)  
To stop recording  
Press [].  
[Note]  
Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder) can  
be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.  
It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.  
The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It  
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)  
The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.  
Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be  
input properly.  
The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will  
not be recorded.  
You cannot record and play simultaneously.  
To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “AV-in  
NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (39).  
Check the time on the unit is correct.  
1
While stopped  
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the  
input channel for the equipment you  
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,  
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the  
unit off and back on.  
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual  
recording (left column).  
RQT8906  
have connected.  
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select “A3”.  
54  
HDD, disc and card management  
Instructions/notes regarding SD Cards and SD Drive are  
applicable to the DMR-EH67 model only.  
Setting the protection  
[RAM]  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
DVD  
TV  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
DRIVE SELECT  
After performing steps 1–3 (left)  
2 3  
1
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc  
4 5 6  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
Protection” and press [OK].  
8 9  
7
DELETE  
-/--  
0
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
press [OK].  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
DVD  
Titles  
Used  
11  
0 : 22  
Remain 5:38 (EP)  
Management  
DVD-RAM  
TIME SLIP  
EXIT  
Disc Name  
Disc Protection  
Delete all titles  
On  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
SELECT  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
Format Disc  
RETURN  
OPTION  
RETURN  
OK  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-  
protected.  
F
Rec  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
Cartridge-protection  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
[SD] ([EH67])  
You can use SD Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 4 GB (7).  
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge  
With the write-protect tab in the protect position,  
play automatically starts when inserted in the  
unit.  
PROTECT  
Common procedures  
1
While stopped  
[SD] ([EH67])  
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK”  
position.  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
and press [OK].  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Providing a name for a disc  
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
FUNCTION MENU  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
G-Code Record  
Playback  
Recording  
Advanced Copy  
Playlists  
You can provide a name for each disc.  
Delete  
Copy  
Flexible Rec  
DV Auto Rec  
Preparation  
To Others  
OK  
Setup  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
[RAM] Release protection (above).  
HDD Management  
RETURN  
After performing steps 1–3 (left)  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD  
Management”, “DVD Management” or  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”  
and press [OK].  
“Card Management” and press [OK].  
e.g., [RAM]  
(58, Entering text)  
DVD  
Titles  
Used  
11  
0 : 22  
Remain 5:38 (EP)  
Management  
DVD-RAM  
The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is  
displayed on the Top Menu.  
[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other  
equipment.  
Disc Name  
Disc Protection  
Delete all titles  
Off  
SELECT  
OK  
Format Disc  
RETURN  
Documentary  
My favorite  
01/02  
DVD  
Management  
DVD-RAM  
Titles  
Used  
11  
0 : 22  
Remain 5:38 (  
01  
Chapter  
02  
Chapter  
1
2
When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and  
“Format HDD” are displayed.  
When SD has been selected, “Format Card” only is  
displayed.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT8906  
55  
HDD, disc and card management  
Refer to the control reference on page 55.  
Deleting all the contents of a disc or  
card—Format  
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete  
all titles  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)  
[SD] ([EH67])  
Preparation  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.  
Release protection (55).  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
Release protection (55).  
[Note]  
After performing steps 1–3 (55)  
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),  
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before  
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc or  
card even if you have set protection.  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all  
titles” and press [OK].  
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
press [OK].  
After performing steps 1–3 (55)  
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”,  
press [OK].  
“Format Disc” or “Format Card” and  
press [OK].  
A message appears when finished.  
7 Press [OK].  
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
press [OK].  
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
press [OK].  
[Note]  
A message appears when formatting is finished.  
[Note]  
Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may  
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).  
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.  
This can render the disc or the card unusable.  
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be  
restored. Make certain before proceeding.  
Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.  
Still picture data (JPEG) or computer data cannot be deleted.  
Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.  
7 Press [OK].  
[Note]  
When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not  
be possible to use it on any other equipment.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed on the disc.  
You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.  
To stop formatting [RAM]  
Press [RETURN].  
You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc  
must be reformatted if you do this.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT8906  
56  
[Note]  
Selecting the background style  
Top  
When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take  
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately four  
times).  
Menu  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD-  
Video top menu after finalising.  
After finalising  
[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you  
can no longer record or edit.  
[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting  
(56) although it becomes play-only after finalising.  
When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] Titles are divided into about 5-minute ([+R] 8-  
minute)§ chapters, if  
–the titles were directly recorded to the disc.  
–the titles were copied using any mode other than the high  
speed mode (excluding [-R]DL] [+R]DL]).  
§ This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode  
of recording.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
After performing steps 1–3 (55)  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”  
and press [OK].  
5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
background and press [OK].  
Top Menu List  
There is a pause of several seconds between titles and  
chapters during play.  
1
2
3
Display after finalising  
01  
Thumbnail  
(Still picture)  
Before  
After  
finalising  
Title Name  
finalising  
You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (41,  
Change Thumbnail)  
Recording/Editing/Entering name  
Play on other players  
Selecting whether to show the Top  
Menu first—Auto-Play Select  
You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s  
equipment.  
If you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than  
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be  
displayed.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising.  
Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players  
due to the condition of the recording.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
After performing steps 1–3 (55)  
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu  
[+RW]  
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient  
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW  
disc on other equipment.  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play  
Select” and press [OK].  
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or  
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.  
“Title 1” and press [OK].  
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.  
Title 1:  
The disc content is played without displaying the  
top menu.  
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (left  
column) before creating top menu.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
Enabling discs to be played on other  
equipment—Finalise  
After performing steps 1–3 (55)  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (above)  
before finalising the disc.  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
Menu” and press [OK].  
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
After performing steps 1–3 (55)  
press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and  
press [OK].  
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
press [OK].  
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.  
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.  
press [OK].  
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
7 Press [OK].  
press [OK].  
[Note]  
A message appears when finalising is finished.  
You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the  
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such  
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.  
[Note]  
You cannot cancel finalising.  
Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.  
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)  
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.  
This will render the disc unusable.  
7 Press [OK].  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT8906  
57  
Entering text  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a  
DVD  
TV  
character and press [OK].  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
CH  
Repeat this step to enter other characters.  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
To delete a character  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field  
and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)  
2 3  
1
Numbered  
buttons  
4 5 6  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
Using the numbered buttons to enter characters  
8 9  
0
7
DELETE  
e.g., entering the letter “R”  
-/--  
DELETE  
¢
1 Press [7] to move to the 7th  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
5
J
K
N
Q
U
L
O
R
V
row.  
7
7
2 Press [7] twice to highlight  
“R”.  
3 Press [OK].  
6 M  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
;
7
TIME SLIP  
P
T
7
To enter a space  
Press [DELETE ¢] and press  
[OK].  
8
OK  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
3 Press [] (Set).  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the Title view  
screen and so on.  
F
Rec  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
[SD] ([EH67])  
To end partway  
Press [RETURN].  
Text is not added.  
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.  
The maximum number of characters:  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Characters  
64 (44§)  
Title  
For your reference  
Playlist  
64  
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu  
after finalisation (57). When entering a title name, the name that  
will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview”  
window.  
Album of still pictures ([EH67])  
36  
Disc ([RAM])  
§ Title name for timer recording  
64  
Enter Name  
Chapter 1_  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
Characters  
_
1
2
3
4
1
A
D
G
2
B
E
H
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
d
g
6
b
e
h
7
c
f
8
i
/
9
j
l
$
0
Top Menu Preview  
Chapter 1  
Title  
Disc  
44  
40  
*
%
i
&
[SD] ([EH67])  
Characters  
36  
Album of still pictures  
[Note]  
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.  
1 Show Enter Name screen.  
Title (timer recording)  
Select “Programme Name” in step 3 on page 27.  
Title  
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 40.  
Playlist  
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 43.  
Disc  
Select “Disc Name” in step 4 of “Providing a name for a  
disc” on page 55.  
Album of still pictures ([EH67])  
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 4 on page 44, “To edit  
the album”.  
Name field: shows the text you have entered  
Enter Name  
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
A
D
G
J
2
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
,
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
6
b
e
7
c
f
8
/
9
$
0
Top Menu Preview  
*
d
g
j
%
h
k
i
7
[
&
@
_
L
O
R
V
Y
?
l
]
Delete  
m
n
o
M
P
T
Set  
S
p
t
q
u
x
'
r
s
{
(
)
-
v
}
W
.
Z
!
w
"
y
:
z
;
|
\
ꢁꢁ  
0
9
^
`
SELECT  
Space  
RETURN  
OK  
RQT8906  
58  
FUNCTION MENU window  
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main  
functions quickly and easily.  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
DVD  
TV  
1
While stopped  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
SELECT  
AV  
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of  
disc.  
2 3  
1
FUNCTION MENU  
4 5 6  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
Playback  
8 9  
0
7
Recording  
DELETE  
-/--  
Delete  
Copy  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
To Others  
OK  
RETURN  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
TIME SLIP  
2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and  
press [OK].  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
If you select “To Others” and press [OK], the following screen  
appears. Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [OK].  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
CREATE  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
FUNCTION MENU  
F
Rec  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
G-Code Record  
Playback  
Recording  
Advanced Copy  
Playlists  
Delete  
Copy  
Flexible Rec  
DV Auto Rec  
To Others  
OK  
Setup  
HDD Management  
RETURN  
If you press [RETURN], you can return to the previous  
screen.  
To exit the FUNCTION MENU window  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
Child Lock  
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote  
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
DVD  
Press and hold [OK] and  
[RETURN]  
simultaneously until “X  
HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.  
TV  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
2 3  
1
4 5 6  
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears  
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
8 9  
0
7
DELETE  
-/--  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
To cancel the Child Lock  
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD”  
disappears.  
PAUSE  
G
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
TIME SLIP  
OK  
OK  
OPTION  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
DISPLAY  
MANUAL SKIP  
RQT8906  
59  
Changing the unit’s settings  
Common procedures  
W
X
CH  
1
While stopped  
REC  
OPEN/CLOSE  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
and press [OK].  
< OPEN/CLOSE  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and  
press [OK].  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the tab and  
DVD  
TV  
press [1].  
Í
Í
Menus  
Options  
Tabs  
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
Setup  
Comb Filter  
Still Mode  
Seamless Play  
On  
Automatic  
On  
2 3  
1
Numbered  
buttons  
Tuning  
4 5 6  
Disc  
Picture  
Sound  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
8 9  
0
7
DELETE  
-/--  
Display  
Connection  
Others  
TAB  
SELECT  
OK  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
RETURN  
PAUSE  
G
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
5 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and  
TIME SLIP  
press [OK].  
EXIT  
6 Press [3, 4] to select the option and  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
press [OK].  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
“Yellow”  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
“Red”  
“Green”  
F
Rec  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT8906  
60  
Summary of settings  
The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.  
Tabs  
Menus  
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)  
Manual Tuning (65)  
Tuning  
Auto-Setup Restart (66)  
Settings for Playback  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
Disc  
Ratings  
8 No Limit: All DVD-Video can be played.  
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.  
1 to 7:  
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding  
ratings recorded on them.  
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password  
with the numbered buttons when the password screen is  
shown.  
0 Lock All: Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.  
Unlock Recorder  
Change Password  
Temporary Unlock  
Change Level  
Do not forget your password.  
Soundtrack Choose the language for audio, subtitle and  
English  
German  
French Italian  
disc menus. [DVD-V]  
Spanish  
Some discs start in a certain language despite Original: The original language of each disc will be selected.  
any changes you make here.  
Other ¢¢¢¢  
Enter a code (67) with the numbered  
buttons when you select “Other ¢¢¢¢”.  
When the selected language is not available  
on the disc, the default language is played.  
There are discs where you can only switch the  
language from the menu screen (31).  
Subtitle  
Menus  
Automatic: If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not  
available, subtitles of that language will automatically  
appear if available on that disc.  
English  
German  
French  
Italian  
Spanish  
Other ¢¢¢¢  
English  
German  
French  
Italian  
Spanish  
Other ¢¢¢¢  
Settings for Recording  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
Recording time in EP mode  
EP (6 Hours):You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB  
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP  
mode (23, Recording modes and approximate recording  
times).  
disc.  
EP (8 Hours):You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB  
disc.  
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when  
using “EP (8 Hours)”.  
Aspect for Recording  
Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying.  
When recording or copying to the HDD or DVD-RAM with  
Automatic: The programme will be recorded in the original  
aspect used when recording started (including when  
recording started at a commercial, etc.).  
“Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be 16:9  
recorded in the original aspect ratio.  
4:3  
In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,  
recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or  
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
–When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW.  
Rec for High Speed Copy  
On: You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press [2, 1] to  
select “Yes” and press [OK].  
You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R,  
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and  
+RW using high speed mode. However, screen size, etc. is  
restricted (right).  
The following restrictions are applied to recorded titles.  
–Recordings are made using the aspect ratio set in  
“Aspect for Recording” (above).  
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to  
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.  
This setting is effective when recording from a television  
programme or external equipment (including DV equipment),  
or when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.  
–Select the type of audio in advance from “Bilingual  
Audio Selection” (62).  
You are no longer able to switch the audio when watching  
a programme on an input channel on the TV connected to  
this unit.  
Off (24)  
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy  
Maximum  
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-  
Normal (Silent):  
speed copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW Selecting “Normal (Silent)” means the noise generated by this  
4X discs).  
unit is less than “Maximum”, however the time required for  
copying will double (approximately).  
(continued on the next page)  
RQT8906  
61  
Changing the unit’s settings  
(continued)  
Refer to the control reference on page 60.  
Tabs  
Menus  
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)  
Comb Filter  
On: Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this setting.  
Off: Select it when recording noisy pictures.  
Picture  
Select the picture sharpness when recording.  
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”  
(66).  
Still Mode  
Automatic  
Field: Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is selected.  
(The picture is coarser.)  
Frame: Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen  
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture is  
clearer and finer.)  
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play  
(77, Frames and fields).  
Seamless Play  
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and  
partially deleted titles.  
On: The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does  
not work when there are several audio types included on  
the playlist and when using Quick View (Play x1.3).  
Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may  
change slightly.  
Off: The points where chapters in playlists change are played  
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.  
Dynamic Range Compression [DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)  
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.  
On  
Off  
Sound  
Bilingual Audio Selection  
M 1  
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type  
when:  
M 2  
You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an  
–Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD- external source, such as when copying from a video cassette  
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.  
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.  
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV  
input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.  
–Recording or copying sound in LPCM (below, “Audio Mode When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of  
for XP Recording”).  
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (below).  
Digital Audio Output  
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (16).  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
PCM Down Conversion  
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96  
kHz or 88.2 kHz.  
Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz despite the  
settings across if the signals have a sampling frequency  
of over 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz, or the disc has copy  
protection.  
On: Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. (Choose  
when the connected equipment cannot process signals  
with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)  
Off: Signals are output as 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz. (Choose when  
the connected equipment can process signals with a  
sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)  
Dolby Digital  
Select how to output the signal.  
Select “Bitstream” if the connected  
equipment decodes the signal.  
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes  
the signal and outputs it as 2  
channels.  
Bitstream:When connecting to equipment displaying the Dolby  
Digital logo.  
PCM: When connecting to equipment not displaying the Dolby  
Digital logo.  
DTS  
Bitstream: When connecting to equipment displaying the DTS  
logo.  
PCM: When connecting to equipment not displaying the DTS  
[Note]  
Not making the proper settings  
may result in noise or some trouble  
for digital recording.  
logo.  
MPEG  
Bitstream: When connected to equipment with a built-in  
MPEG decoder.  
PCM: When connected to equipment without a built-in MPEG  
decoder.  
Audio Mode for XP Recording  
Dolby Digital (77)  
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP  
mode.  
LPCM (77)  
–The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than  
that of normal XP mode recordings.  
–The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you  
selected LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.  
–When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of  
audio in advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (above).  
Audio Mode for DV Input  
Stereo 1: Records audio (L1, R1).  
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s Stereo 2: Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)  
DV input terminal (54).  
subsequent to original recording.  
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.  
Mix:  
When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in  
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (above).  
RQT8906  
62  
Tabs  
Menus  
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)  
On-Screen Messages  
Choose whether to show status messages automatically.  
Automatic  
Off  
Display  
Grey Background  
On  
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey  
background when tuner reception is weak.  
Off  
FL Display  
Bright  
Dim  
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.  
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”  
(64) to “On”.  
Automatic: The display turns dark during play and disappears  
when the unit is turned off. It reappears  
momentarily if a button is pressed. While using this  
mode, the standby power consumption can be  
reduced.  
TV Aspect (19)  
Set to match the type of 16:9: When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.  
Connection  
Pan & Scan:  
television connected.  
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television, side  
picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture (77).  
Letterbox:  
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.  
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style (77).  
Progressive (20)  
On  
Off  
This setting is fixed with “Off” if you set  
AV1 Output” to “RGB 1 (without  
component)” or “RGB 2 (without  
component)”.  
TV System (66)  
PAL  
NTSC  
HDMI Settings§  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
HDMI Video Format  
576i/480i  
576p/480p  
720p  
1080i  
1080p:  
You can only select items compatible with the connected  
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be  
changed. However if you are concerned about output  
picture quality, it may be improved by changing the setting.  
Still pictures play at a resolution equivalent to 480p  
regardless of the settings.  
When setting video output to “1080p”, we  
recommend using a Panasonic HDMI cable 5  
meters or less in length to prevent video distortion.  
To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p,  
you need to connect the unit to 1080p compatible  
HDTV.  
Automatic: Automatically selects the output resolution best  
suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,  
720p, 576p/480p or 576i/480i).  
Aspect for 4:3 Video  
4:3:  
Picture output expands left or right.  
To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set  
how to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television.  
16:9: Picture is output as original aspect with  
side panels.  
Digital Audio Output  
HDMI and Optical  
Optical Only: Select when this unit is connected to an amplifier  
with an optical digital audio cable and connected  
to a TV with an HDMI cable and you want to enjoy  
the highest quality of audio from discs (16).  
VIERA Link  
On  
Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with Off: Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.  
an HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.  
AV1 Output  
Video (with component):  
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite  
signal.  
S Video (with component):  
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video  
signal.  
Selects the output from the AV1 terminal.  
Select “Video (with component)” or “S Video (with component)”  
for component output (progressive output).  
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.  
RGB 1 (without component):  
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.  
If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB  
signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically  
switch to display the picture from the unit when the unit is  
turned on.  
If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select  
“RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”.  
RGB 2 (without component):  
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.  
If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit  
only when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.  
AV2 Input  
Video  
This setting is according to the output signal of the connected  
equipment.  
S Video  
§
RQT8906  
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may not be able to  
change the settings.  
63  
(continued on the next page)  
Changing the unit’s settings  
(continued)  
Refer to the control reference on page 60.  
Tabs  
Menus  
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)  
Remote Control (21)  
Clock (67)  
DVD 1  
DVD 2  
DVD 3  
Others  
Power Save  
On: Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned to  
Refer to the following when “Power Save” is set to “On”.  
–“FL Display” is automatically set to “Automatic” (63).  
–The “Quick Start” function does not work. (It is automatically  
turned to “Off”.)  
standby (78).  
Off  
If “Quick Start” is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically  
turned to “Off”.  
Quick Start  
On  
The Quick Start feature enables this unit to be ready to start  
recording as quick as approx. 1 second§ after turning it on. You  
can start recording soon after deciding you want to record  
something.  
Off:  
Standby power consumption is less than when this is set  
to “On”.  
§Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM.  
If this is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically turned to  
“Off”.  
Startup takes up to a minute when:  
You play a disc or start recording to discs other than  
DVD-RAM.  
You want to make other operations.  
–The clock has not been set.  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Country  
Australia  
New Zealand  
Others  
DivX Registration  
You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX  
Video-on-Demand (VOD) content (35).  
Initialize  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
Shipping Condition  
Yes  
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password No  
and clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer  
recording programmes are also cancelled.  
Default Settings  
Yes  
All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings, No  
country settings§, disc language settings, ratings level,  
ratings password, remote control code, return to the factory  
presets.  
§ Only for Australia and N.Z.  
RQT8906  
64  
Tuning  
To change the tuning settings for individual  
programme position  
1
While stopped  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1]  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
Pos  
Name  
Channel  
1
ARD  
4
to select a  
Manual  
Tuning  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
programme position  
and press [OK].  
Fine Tuning Auto  
Mono  
and press [OK].  
Off  
SELECT  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and  
RETURN  
press [OK].  
RETURN : leave  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Tuning” and  
press [1].  
Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].  
Setup  
Manual Tuning  
Auto-Setup Restart  
Pos  
To change the programme position in which  
the TV stations are assigned  
Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to select the  
number of the desired programme position and  
press [OK].  
Tuning  
Disc  
Picture  
Sound  
Display  
Connection  
TAB  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
Others  
Name  
Channel  
To enter or change the name of a TV station  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name and  
press [OK].  
If the station name needs a blank space, select  
the blank between “Z” and “¢”.  
Manual Tuning  
You can add or delete channels, or change programme positions.  
To enter newly available TV stations or change  
the channel number of an already tuned TV  
station  
Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to enter  
the channel number of the desired TV station.  
Wait a few moments until the desired TV station  
has been tuned.  
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Manual  
Tuning” and press [OK].  
Manual Tuning  
Pos Name Ch  
Pos Name Ch  
1
2
3
ARD  
ZDF  
N3  
4
2
5
8
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
4
5
HR3  
BR3  
After the desired TV station is tuned, press [OK].  
6
7
8
9
SELECT  
OK  
Fine Tuning  
To obtain the best tuning condition  
Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning condition  
and press [OK].  
RETURN  
10  
Delete  
Move  
Add  
Press [1] to return to “Auto”.  
To delete a programme position  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the  
“Red” button.  
Video  
System§  
To select the video system type  
Press [3, 4] to select “PAL” or “SECAM” if the  
picture lacks colour, and press [OK].  
Auto:  
This unit automatically distinguishes  
PAL and SECAM signals.  
For receiving PAL signals.  
To add a blank programme position  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the  
“Green” button.  
PAL:  
SECAM: For receiving SECAM signals.  
To move a TV station to another programme position  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press  
the “Yellow” button.  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the new programme position to  
which you want to assign the TV station and press [OK].  
This setting is also available when you select the  
external input channel (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4) in  
step 5.  
In order to record properly, make the appropriate  
settings to match the connected equipment.  
Audio  
Mode§  
To select the audio reception type  
If sound quality is poor, press [3, 4] to select  
“BG”, “I” or “DK” and press [OK].  
BG: PAL B.G.  
I:  
PAL I  
DK: PAL D.K.K1  
Mono  
To select the type of sound to be recorded  
Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo sound is  
distorted due to inferior reception conditions, or if  
you want to record the normal (mono) sound  
during a stereo, bilingual or NICAM broadcast,  
and press [OK].  
§ Only for Asia and Middle East  
RQT8906  
65  
Changing the unit’s settings  
Refer to the control reference on page 60.  
Auto-Setup Restart  
TV System  
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting with,  
or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles on the  
HDD.  
You can restart auto channel setting if set up (19) fails for some  
reason.  
After performing steps 1–4 (65)  
1
While stopped  
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Setup  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
Restart” and press [OK].  
The confirmation screen appears.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
and press [OK].  
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and  
press [OK].  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
press [OK].  
If the country setting menu appears on the television  
Press [3, 4] to select the country and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”  
and press [1].  
You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Setup.  
When the unit is on and stopped,  
5 Press [3, 4] to select “TV System”  
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the  
country setting screen§ or the Auto-Setup screen appears.  
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and  
clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording  
programmes are also cancelled.  
and press [OK].  
Setup  
TV System  
PAL  
NTSC  
Tuning  
Disc  
§ Only for Australia and N.Z.  
Picture  
Sound  
Display  
SELECT  
OK  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
Connection  
Others  
RETURN  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
6 Press [3, 4] to select the TV system  
and press [OK].  
PAL (factory preset)  
List of TV Reception Channels  
–Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system  
television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as PAL  
60.  
–Select to record television programmes and PAL input from  
other equipment.  
[For]Asia]  
Tuner  
System  
Channel  
Coverage  
VHF  
UHF  
CATV  
[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on the  
HDD.  
NTSC  
–Select when connecting to a NTSC television. Television  
programmes cannot be recorded properly.  
–Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.  
[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded on  
the HDD.  
S01–S05  
M1–M10  
U1–U10  
S21–S41  
PAL–BGH,  
SECAM–BG  
CCIR  
E2–E12 E21–E69  
Hong  
Kong  
PAL–I  
21  
69  
PAL–DK,  
SECAM–DKK1  
44 MHz to  
470 MHz  
OIRT  
R1–R12  
1–12  
21  
13  
69  
57  
7 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
PAL–D  
China  
Z1Z35  
press [OK].  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
Tuner  
System  
Channel  
Coverage  
VHF  
UHF  
CATV  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
45 MHz to  
470 MHz  
PAL–B  
Australia  
0–12  
1–11  
28–69  
21–69  
To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)  
While stopped, keep pressing [] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the  
main unit simultaneously for 5 or more seconds.  
New  
Zealand  
44 MHz to  
470 MHz  
PAL–BG  
[Note]  
[For]Middle]East]  
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have  
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can  
be recorded onto the HDD.)  
Tuner  
System  
Channel  
Coverage  
VHF  
UHF  
CATV  
S01–S05  
M1–M10  
U1–U10  
S21–S41  
PAL–BGH,  
SECAM–BG  
CCIR  
E2–E12 E21–E69  
South  
Africa  
PAL–I  
4
13  
21  
21  
69  
69  
PAL–DK,  
SECAM–  
DKK1  
44 MHz to  
470 MHz  
OIRT  
R1–R12  
RQT8906  
66  
Clock Settings  
In the case of a power failure, the clock setting remains in memory for approximately 60 minutes.  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [1].  
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Clock” and press [OK].  
Clock  
Time  
15  
Date  
1
:
45  
:
39  
.
8
.
2007  
Number  
0
9
Please set clock manually.  
OK: store RETURN: leave  
CHANGE  
SELECT  
OK  
RETURN  
6 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.  
The items change as follows:  
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year  
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J  
7 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.  
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.  
8 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.  
The clock starts.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.  
Abkhazian:  
Afar:  
6566 Catalan:  
6565 Chinese:  
6570 Corsican:  
8381 Croatian:  
6577 Czech:  
6582 Danish:  
7289 Dutch:  
6583 English:  
6589 Esperanto:  
6590 Estonian:  
6665 Faroese:  
6985 Fiji:  
6765 Gujarati:  
9072 Hausa:  
6779 Hebrew:  
7282 Hindi:  
6783 Hungarian:  
6865 Icelandic:  
7876 Indonesian:  
6978 Interlingua:  
6979 Irish:  
7185 Lingala:  
7265 Lithuanian:  
7387 Macedonian:  
7273 Malagasy:  
7285 Malay:  
7383 Malayalam:  
7378 Maltese:  
7365 Maori:  
7165 Marathi:  
7384 Moldavian:  
7465 Mongolian:  
7487 Nauru:  
7578 Nepali:  
7583 Norwegian:  
7575 Oriya:  
7589 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Spanish:  
7579 Persian:  
7585 Polish:  
7678 Rhaeto-Romance:  
Tamil:  
8465  
8484  
8469  
8472  
6679  
8473  
8479  
8482  
8475  
8487  
8575  
8582  
8590  
8673  
8679  
6789  
8779  
8872  
7473  
8979  
9085  
7684  
8277 Tatar:  
8279 Telugu:  
8285 Thai:  
8377 Tibetan:  
8365 Tigrinya:  
Afrikaans:  
Albanian:  
Amharic:  
Arabic:  
Armenian:  
Assamese:  
Aymara:  
Azerbaijani:  
Bashkir:  
Basque:  
7775 Romanian:  
7771 Russian:  
7783 Samoan:  
7776 Sanskrit:  
7784 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Tonga:  
7773 Serbian: 8382 Turkish:  
7782 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:  
6984 Italian:  
7779 Shona:  
7778 Sindhi:  
7865 Singhalese:  
7869 Slovak:  
7879 Slovenian:  
7982 Somali:  
8378 Twi:  
8368 Ukrainian:  
8373 Urdu:  
7079 Japanese:  
7074 Javanese:  
7073 Kannada:  
7082 Kashmiri:  
7089 Kazakh:  
7176 Kirghiz:  
7565 Korean:  
6869 Kurdish:  
6976 Laotian:  
7576 Latin:  
Bengali; Bangla:  
Finnish:  
8375 Uzbek:  
8376 Vietnamese:  
8379 Volapük:  
6983 Welsh:  
8385 Wolof:  
8387 Xhosa:  
8386 Yiddish:  
8476 Yoruba:  
8471 Zulu:  
6678 French:  
6890 Frisian:  
6672 Galician:  
6682 Georgian:  
6671 German:  
7789 Greek:  
Bhutani:  
Bihari:  
Breton:  
7065 Sundanese:  
8076 Swahili:  
8084 Swedish:  
8065 Tagalog:  
8185 Tajik:  
Bulgarian:  
Burmese:  
Byelorussian: 6669 Greenlandic:  
Cambodian: 7577 Guarani:  
7679 Portuguese:  
7665 Punjabi:  
7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:  
RQT8906  
67  
Messages  
On the television  
Page  
Authorisation Error.  
You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different  
34, 35  
registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)  
Cannot finish recording completely. The programme was copy-protected.  
22  
The HDD or disc may be full.  
The maximum number of program has been exceeded.  
Cannot playback.  
TV system is different from the  
setting.  
You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV  
system currently selected on the unit.  
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.  
66  
To playback, please change the TV  
System in Setup.  
Cannot record to the disc.  
Unable to format.  
The disc may be dirty or scratched.  
10  
Cannot play on this unit.  
You tried to play a non-compatible image.  
Turn the unit off and re-insert the card.  
33  
13  
Cannot record. Disc is full.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.  
[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is  
no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW  
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.]  
41, 46,  
56  
Cannot record. Maximum number of  
titles exceeded.  
Use a new disc.  
No Disc  
The disc may be upside down.  
No folders.  
There is no compatible folder in this unit.  
7, 33  
13  
No SD CARD  
No valid SD card.  
[EH67]  
The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already  
inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.  
The format of the card inserted is incomplete.  
7
Not enough space in the copy  
destination.  
Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.  
41, 45,  
46, 56  
Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination  
Capacity” is not exceeded.  
50, 53  
4–5  
This is a non-recordable disc.  
The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalised DVD-  
R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW.  
This disc is not formatted properly.  
Format it using DVD Management in  
FUNCTION MENU.  
You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW.  
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the  
HDD and then copy to the disc.  
56  
Not enough space on HDD. Space  
of 4 hours (in SP mode) is  
necessary.  
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD  
or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are  
greater than 500.  
46  
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD.  
Maximum number of titles is  
recorded on HDD. Please delete  
unnecessary titles.  
Rental Expired.  
The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX)  
35  
The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.  
$
RQT8906  
68  
On the unit’s display  
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.  
Page  
21  
DVD   
The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.  
(“” stands for a number.)  
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more  
than 5 seconds.  
HARD ERR§  
NoERAS  
If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.  
You cannot delete items on this disc.  
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.  
NoREAD  
The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.  
This message may appear when the DVD lens cleaner has finished cleaning.  
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.  
10  
10  
NoWRIT  
You cannot write to this disc.  
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.  
PLEASE WAIT§  
There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying  
out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken.  
Wait until the message disappears.  
PROG FULL§  
There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes.  
29  
SP 35:50  
Available space on the HDD or disc.  
LP 151h  
“SP”, “LP” and the numbers  
are examples.  
The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP  
151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available.  
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151  
hours”.  
UNFORMAT§  
You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-  
Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment.  
Format the disc to use it.  
56  
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.  
UNSUPPORT§  
F74  
You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.  
4–6  
The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.  
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.  
F75  
U59  
The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.  
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.  
The unit is hot.  
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message  
disappears.  
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear  
of the unit.  
U61  
(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or  
copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not  
broken. Once the display disappears you can use the unit again.  
U72  
U73  
The HDMI connection acts unusually.  
–The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.  
–The HDMI cable is too long. Please use a cable 5.0 meters or less.  
–The HDMI cable is damaged.  
U76  
HDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not support copyright  
protection.  
U80  
U81  
U99  
The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode. Now  
press [Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.  
U88  
(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while  
recording, playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to  
normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display disappears you can use the unit again.  
71  
H or F  
There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s  
condition.)  
Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the  
following.  
71–76  
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.  
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)  
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the  
dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service.  
X HOLD  
The Child Lock function is activated.  
59  
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD” disappears.  
§The message are alternately displayed.  
RQT8906  
69  
Frequently asked questions  
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.  
Set up  
Page  
What equipment is necessary to play  
multi channel surround sound?  
You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other equipment. You must 16, 17  
connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a  
built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder.  
Are the headphones and speakers  
directly connected to the unit?  
You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through the amplifier etc.  
16, 17  
The television has both S VIDEO IN  
terminal and COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
terminals. Which terminal should I  
connect with?  
Connecting with the component video out terminal provides a more vivid picture  
compared to connecting with the S Video out terminal.  
16  
If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan,  
connect through the component video terminals for high-quality progressive video.  
If you have a CRT television or a multi system television using PAL mode that is  
compatible with progressive scan, we cannot recommend progressive output as some  
flickering can occur.  
Is my television progressive output  
compatible?  
All Panasonic televisions that have 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p input terminals  
are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of television.  
Disc  
Can I play DVD-Video and Video CDs  
bought in another country?  
You cannot play DVD-Video if their region numbers are not supported by this unit.  
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.  
Cover  
Can a DVD-Video that does not have a  
region number be played?  
The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot play  
discs that do not have a region number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to  
a standard.  
Please tell me about disc compatibility  
with this unit.  
This unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and  
plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to a  
DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are possible).  
This unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW discs.  
4–6  
Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following  
6, 33  
compatibility with this unit.  
standards: CD-DA, Video CD, DivX, MP3 and still pictures (JPEG).  
You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.  
Recording  
Can I record from a commercially  
purchased video cassette or DVD?  
Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore, recording  
is usually not possible.  
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD- You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalising the disc on  
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW  
recorded on this unit be played on other  
equipment?  
this unit. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and  
capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.  
If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.  
Can I record digital audio signals using  
this unit?  
You cannot record digital signals from other equipment. The digital audio terminals on this  
unit are for output only. (The audio recorded using the unit’s DV input terminal from a  
digital video camcorder, for example, is recorded digitally.)  
Can a digital audio signal from this unit  
be recorded to other equipment?  
You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio  
Output” settings to the following in the Setup menu.  
–PCM Down Conversion: On  
62  
–Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM  
However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is permitted and the recording  
equipment is compatible with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.  
You cannot record MP3 signals.  
Can I switch to bilingual broadcast  
during recording?  
With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [AUDIO].  
(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”)  
32  
62  
With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you cannot. Change before  
recording with “Bilingual Audio Selection” in the Setup menu.  
Can I high speed copy to a disc?  
Yes, you can. (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On” before recording the  
programme.)  
47  
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.  
RQT8906  
70  
Troubleshooting guide  
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart  
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.  
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:  
Regular disc rotating sounds.  
Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.  
Image disturbance during search.  
Interruptions in reception due to periodic terrestrial broadcasting  
breaks.  
A sound is heard when the HDD goes into power save mode, or  
operations are slow to respond in power save mode.  
Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a  
Panasonic disc.)  
The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being activated.  
(Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)  
When the HDD has been automatically placed in the power save  
mode (9), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an  
unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.  
Power  
Page  
14  
No power.  
Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains socket.  
The unit does not turn on  
pressing [Í DVD].  
The unit switches to standby  
mode.  
One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to turn the unit on.  
The power is turned off  
automatically.  
If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV with an HDMI cable, this unit  
will be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode.  
17  
Displays  
The display is dim.  
Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu.  
63  
67  
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s  
display.  
Set the clock.  
The time recorded on the disc  
Times shown may disagree with actual times.  
and the available time shown do Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases only when the  
not add up. last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.  
The displayed time of this unit is Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL, there is no  
different from the actual increase in disc space.  
recording time or MP3 recording More disc space than the actual recording time is used after recording or editing the DVD-R,  
time.  
DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.  
While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.  
Compared to the actual recorded The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames  
time, the elapsed time displayed  
is less.  
(Only when recording in NTSC)  
(equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time  
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as  
approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.  
“U88” is displayed and the disc  
cannot be ejected.  
The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following to eject the disc.  
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.  
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10  
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.  
2
While the unit is off, press and hold [] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for  
about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.  
TV screen and video  
Television reception worsens  
after connecting the unit.  
This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment.  
It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not  
solved by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.  
Status messages do not appear. Select “Automatic” in “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup menu.  
63  
63  
The grey background does not  
appear.  
Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu.  
Picture does not appear during  
timer recording.  
Timer recordings work regardless of whether the unit is on or off. To confirm the timer  
recording is going to work properly, turn the unit on.  
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture  
expands left and right.  
Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does not have that function, set  
“Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”.  
39  
Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.  
63  
63  
61  
Screen size is wrong.  
If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to “16:9” in the Setup menu.  
By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance that the recording will be  
made using the wrong aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording.  
Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “4:3”.  
61  
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating  
instructions.  
(continued on the next page)  
RQT8906  
71  
Troubleshooting guide  
TV screen and video (continued)  
Page  
Titles recorded with 16:9 aspect  
are stretched vertically.  
16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or  
longer)” recording mode.  
–If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.  
–If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in the Setup menu.  
When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same aspect, set “Rec for High Speed  
Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”.  
61  
–By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance that the recording will be  
made using the wrong aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording.  
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating  
instructions.  
61  
There is a lot of after-image  
when playing video.  
Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”.  
39  
39  
When playing DVD-Video using  
progressive output, one part of  
the picture momentarily appears  
to be doubled up.  
Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method  
or material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.  
There is no apparent change in  
picture quality when adjusted  
with the Picture menu in the on-  
screen menus.  
The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.  
The images from this unit do not Make sure that the television is connected to the VIDEO OUT terminal,  
14–17  
appear on the television.  
S VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals or HDMI AV OUT terminal on  
this unit.  
Picture is distorted.  
Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct.  
Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is not progressive compatible.  
Press and hold [] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for more than 5  
seconds to cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.  
The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used by the disc now playing. While  
stopped, keep pressing [] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds.  
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.  
66  
When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that matches with this unit’s TV  
system.  
Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.  
Reduce the number of connected devices.  
The picture is distorted during  
play, or video will not play  
correctly.  
You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor reception or unfavorable weather  
conditions.  
The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear briefly between recorded titles in  
the following situations:  
–between titles recorded with different recording modes.  
–between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.  
–between scenes recorded with different resolutions.  
–between playlist chapters.  
Sound  
No sound.  
Low volume.  
Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the  
amplifier if you have connected one.  
14–17,  
62  
Distorted sound.  
Cannot hear the desired audio  
type.  
Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.  
Turn off V.S.S. in the following cases.  
–When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.  
–When playing bilingual broadcast programmes.  
32  
39  
Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)  
Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.  
Reduce the number of connected devices.  
The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the HDMI AV OUT  
terminal or the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.  
To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “Digital Audio Output” to  
“HDMI and Optical” in the Setup menu.  
Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this unit is connected  
with an HDMI cable.  
If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you  
can only record either the main or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast.  
If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),  
+R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”.  
63  
61  
Cannot switch audio.  
You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.  
–When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the  
disc tray while DVD drive is selected.  
–When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM”.  
–When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default setting is “On”.)  
62  
61  
The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable or an HDMI cable. You cannot switch 16, 17,  
the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using  
audio cables.  
62  
There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.  
RQT8906  
72  
Operation  
Page  
20  
Cannot operate the television.  
Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be operated even if you change the  
The remote control doesn’t work.  
code.  
The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote  
21  
control.  
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time  
for more than 5 seconds.  
The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.  
You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s remote control signal sensor during  
operation.  
11  
Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.  
Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sunlight  
exposure.  
It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after changing the batteries.  
It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.  
The child lock function is activated.  
20–21  
20  
59  
The unit is on but cannot be  
operated.  
Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.  
Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.  
22, 30  
The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to disappear.  
One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.  
Reset the unit as follows:  
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.  
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10  
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.  
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one minute, then reconnect it.  
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still cannot be operated, consult the  
dealer.  
2
HDD activation is slow.  
Cannot eject disc.  
The HDD is in power save mode.  
9
The unit is recording.  
The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and hold [] and [CH W] on the main  
unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.  
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the Child Lock  
function.  
59  
Cannot tune channels.  
Startup is slow.  
Check the connections.  
14–15  
Make sure that “Quick Start” is set to “On”.  
Startup takes time in the following situations:  
–A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.  
64  
–The clock is not set.  
–Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.  
–For a few minutes after 5:15 am due to system maintenance of this unit.  
–When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.  
RQT8906  
73  
Troubleshooting guide  
Recording, timer recording and copying  
Page  
4, 5  
Cannot record.  
Cannot copy.  
You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the  
unit can record onto.  
The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the disc is protected with DVD  
Management.  
56  
55  
Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM).  
You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of titles has reached  
its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc.  
77  
41, 46,  
56  
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit.  
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.  
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the  
HDD and then copy.  
41, 46,  
56  
–If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from the HDD to a  
blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode  
recording is necessary).  
–If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has exceeded 500.  
You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you can record and copy again if  
you format DVD-RW.  
Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and  
+RW you may be unable to record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or  
switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty times.  
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit  
may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.  
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings.  
(However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded  
with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.  
Cannot record from external  
equipment.  
Check that the connection is correct.  
Select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.  
15, 54  
Timer recording does not work  
properly.  
The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap. Correct the  
programme.  
The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer icon “F” in the timer recording  
list is not on.)  
29  
29  
67  
G-CODE§ programming does not  
work properly.  
§ Only for Australia and N.Z.  
Set the clock.  
Timer recording does not stop  
even when [] is pressed.  
Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
recording drive.  
If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Quick Start” is set to “On”,  
you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.  
28  
The timer programme remains  
even after recording finishes.  
The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly.  
27  
A part or whole of a recorded  
title has been lost.  
If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the household mains socket while  
recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.  
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer  
any guarantee regarding lost programmes or discs.  
56  
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc.  
disc using the high speed mode.  
When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” in the Setup menu. (The  
default setting is “On”.)  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot  
perform high-speed copy.  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD Recorders with “Rec for High  
Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL  
or +RW discs with high-speed copy.  
61  
When copying, it takes a long  
time even when high speed  
mode is selected.  
Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc is high speed  
recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the  
disc.  
It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.  
You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when using other Panasonic  
DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP (8 Hours) mode recording.  
An unusually loud sound is  
coming from the rotating DVD-R,  
etc.  
When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video  
format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal,  
however, this is not a problem.  
The DV automatic recording  
function does not work.  
If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the connections and DV  
equipment settings.  
54  
You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television.  
Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV  
equipment are not successive.  
Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate properly.  
The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV tape.  
54  
RQT8906  
74  
Play  
Page  
Play fails to start even when  
[1] (PLAY) is pressed.  
Play starts but then stops  
immediately.  
Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.  
The disc is dirty.  
30  
10  
4–6  
You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.  
You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the equipment used for recording.  
You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was recorded to DVD-RAM  
using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to  
copyright protection.  
When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD  
players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP (6 Hours)” mode.  
You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.  
61  
If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you purchased it. (DivX)  
35  
Audio and video momentarily  
pause.  
This occurs between playlist chapters.  
This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high  
speed mode.  
This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.  
5
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches  
between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video  
and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.  
DVD-Video is not played.  
You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting.  
61  
Ensure disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number, and is not defective.  
Cover  
Alternative soundtrack and  
subtitles cannot be selected.  
The languages are not recorded on the disc.  
You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the soundtrack and subtitles on  
some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes.  
31  
No subtitles.  
Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.  
Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu to “On”.  
38  
Angle cannot be changed.  
Angles can only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded.  
You have forgotten your ratings  
password.  
You want to cancel the ratings  
level.  
The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE  
SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main  
unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the unit’s display).  
Quick View does not work.  
This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.  
This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.  
The resume play function does  
not work.  
Memorized positions are cancelled when  
–press [] several times.  
–open the disc tray (excluding [HDD]).  
[SD] ([EH67]) [CD] [VCD] turn off the power.  
–if a recording or timer recording was executed.  
The Video CD picture does not  
display properly.  
When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV System” in the Setup menu.  
When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture cannot be displayed correctly during  
search.  
66  
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does These functions do not work with finalised discs.  
not work.  
Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings are different from the title  
66  
recorded on the disc.  
It takes time before play starts.  
Picture stops.  
This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)  
Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)  
Cannot see the beginning of the (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable)  
title played.  
When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you may not be able to see the  
beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the  
beginning of the title.  
Edit  
Available disc space does not  
increase even after deleting a  
title.  
Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL.  
Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video  
format) and +RW. The disc space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.  
46  
Cannot edit.  
You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space.  
46  
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.  
Cannot format.  
The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.  
10  
You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in this unit.  
4–6  
Cannot create chapters.  
The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the  
disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption to the power before this.  
These operations are not possible with still pictures.  
You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before a  
start point.  
Cannot mark the start point or  
the end point during “Partial  
Delete” operation.  
Cannot delete chapters.  
Cannot create a playlist.  
When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer.  
41  
You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title also includes still pictures. Select  
them individually.  
RQT8906  
75  
Troubleshooting guide  
Still pictures  
Page  
Cannot display Direct Navigator  
screen.  
This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy.  
Cannot edit or format a card.  
Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards, the “Write Protection Off” message  
55  
([EH67])  
sometimes appears on the screen even when protection has been set.)  
The contents of the card cannot  
be read. ([EH67])  
The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card may be damaged.)  
This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT 12 and  
FAT 16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in FAT 32 format.  
The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible with this  
unit.  
7, 33  
7
Turn off and then turn on the unit again.  
You can use SD Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 4 GB.  
This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures on an SD Card.  
Copying, deleting and setting  
protection takes a long time.  
([EH67])  
When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few hours.  
When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time. Format the disc or  
card.  
56  
VIERA Link  
VIERA Link doesn’t work.  
Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is displayed on the front display when  
the power for the main unit is set to On.  
Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”.  
63  
Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.  
If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was changed, or if there was a  
power failure or the plug was removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control”  
may not work.  
In this case, perform the following operations.  
1
2
3
When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the power on, turn the TV  
(VIERA) on again.  
Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control” function to off, and then set to on  
again. (For more information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)  
Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit, and after this unit’s screen is  
displayed check that “HDAVI Control” is working.  
To reset this unit  
To return all the settings other  
than the main ones to the factory  
preset  
Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the settings except for the ratings  
level, ratings password and clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording  
programmes are also cancelled.  
Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the settings other than the tuning  
settings, clock settings, country settings§, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings  
password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.  
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the country setting screen§ or the  
Auto-Setup screen appears. All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and  
clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also  
cancelled.  
64  
64  
§ Only for Australia and N.Z.  
To reset the ratings level  
settings  
While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and  
hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.  
To restore the unit if it freezes  
due to one of the safety devices  
being activated  
Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The settings remain.)  
RQT8906  
76  
Glossary  
Bitstream  
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)  
HDMI is a next-generation digital interface for consumer electronic  
products. Unlike conventional connections, it transmits  
uncompressed digital video and audio signals on a single cable. This  
unit supports high-definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i  
(1125i), 1080p (1125p)] from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy  
high-definition video a high definition compatible television is  
required.  
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)  
before it is decoded into its various channels.  
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)  
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to  
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with  
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.  
Decoder  
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)  
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This  
is called decoding.  
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.  
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,  
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The  
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering  
the degree of compression.  
DivX  
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX  
media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality  
that maintains a relatively small file size.  
LPCM (Linear PCM)  
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on  
CDs. LPCM sound is available when recording in XP mode.  
Dolby Digital  
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby  
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can  
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can  
be recorded on one disc using this method.  
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default  
audio.  
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)  
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.  
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based  
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.  
SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be  
copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.  
Down-mixing  
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)  
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on  
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to  
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s  
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then  
only output the front two channels.  
An audio compression method that compresses audio to  
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of  
audio quality. You can play MP3 you have recorded onto CD-R and  
CD-RW.  
Pan&Scan/Letterbox  
Drive  
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be  
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images  
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of  
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.  
Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture fills  
the screen.  
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc  
(DVD) and SD Card (SD) ([EH67]). These perform the reading and  
writing of data.  
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)  
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good  
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are  
possible.  
Dynamic range  
Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and  
bottom of the picture so the picture itself  
appears in an aspect ratio of 16:9.  
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound  
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest  
level of sound before distortion occurs.  
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the  
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low  
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.  
Playback control (PBC)  
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and  
information with menus.  
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)  
Film and video  
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can  
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable  
method of progressive output.  
Progressive/Interlace  
The PAL video signal standard has 576 (or 625) interlaced (i) scan  
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 576p (or 625p), uses  
twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are  
called 480i (or 525i) and 480p (or 525p) respectively.  
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video  
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.  
Film: Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24 frames  
per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs recorded at 30 frames  
per second as well.)  
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.  
Video: Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL discs) or  
30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs). Generally  
appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.  
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.  
Panasonic televisions with 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p  
input terminals are progressive compatible.  
Finalise  
Protection  
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.  
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalise  
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this  
unit.  
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or  
deletion protection.  
RGB  
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),  
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.  
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,  
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.  
After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer  
record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for  
recording again.  
Folder  
Sampling frequency  
This is a place on the hard disk, disc or SD Card ([EH67]) where  
groups of data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to  
the place where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 ([EH67]) are stored.  
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave  
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital  
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per  
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the  
original sound.  
Formatting  
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM  
recordable on recording equipment.  
Thumbnail  
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),  
+RW, SD Cards ([EH67]) and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on  
this unit. Formatting permanently deletes all contents.  
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display  
multiple pictures in the form of a list.  
1080i  
Frames and fields  
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see  
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.  
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass  
every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because  
1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of  
480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic  
and rich image.  
u
r
1080p  
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the  
same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.  
Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,  
there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.  
Frame  
Field  
Field  
A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but  
picture quality is generally better.  
A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but  
there is no blurring.  
720p  
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same  
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since  
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there  
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.  
HDD (Hard disk drive)  
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk  
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and  
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading  
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.  
RQT8906  
77  
Specifications  
Recording system  
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format  
Television system  
DVD-R : DVD-Video format§1  
[For]Asia]  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format§1  
Tuner system  
Channel coverage  
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format§1  
PAL-DK,  
SECAM-DKK1  
OIRT  
VHF: R1 to R12  
UHF: 21 to 69  
CATV: 44 MHz to 470 MHz  
+R  
+R DL (Double Layer)  
+RW  
PAL-BGH,  
SECAM-BG  
CCIR  
VHF: E2 to E12  
UHF: E21 to E69  
CATV: S01 to S05,  
Recordable discs  
DVD-RAM:  
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),  
2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)  
1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),  
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)  
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)  
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),  
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)  
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),  
M1 to M10, U1 to U10, S21 to S41  
DVD-R:  
PAL-I  
Hong Kong  
UHF: 21 to 69  
DVD-R DL:  
DVD-RW:  
PAL-D  
China  
VHF: 1 to 12  
UHF: 13 to 57  
CATV: Z1 to Z35  
+R:  
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)  
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)  
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)  
RF converter output:  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Tuner system  
PAL-B  
Australia  
Not provided  
+R DL:  
+RW:  
Recording time  
Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)  
XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours  
LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours  
Channel coverage  
VHF: 0 to 12  
UHF: 28 to 69  
CATV: 45 MHz to 470 MHz  
[EH57]  
Maximum Approx. 284 hours with 160 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)  
PAL-BG  
New Zealand  
VHF: 1 to 11  
UHF: 21 to 69  
CATV: 44 MHz to 470 MHz  
XP: Approx. 36 hours, SP: Approx. 70 hours  
LP: Approx. 138 hours, EP: Approx. 212 hours/284 hours  
[EH67]  
Maximum Approx. 443 hours with 250 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)  
XP: Approx. 55 hours, SP: Approx. 111 hours  
LP: Approx. 222 hours, EP: Approx. 333 hours/443 hours  
RF converter output:  
[For]Middle]East]  
Not provided  
Tuner system  
Channel coverage  
Playable discs  
PAL-BGH,  
SECAM-BG  
CCIR  
VHF: E2 to E12  
UHF: E21 to E69  
CATV: S01 to S05, M1 to M10,  
U1 to U10, S21 to S41  
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format  
DVD-R : DVD-Video format, DivX  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format, DivX  
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format  
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW  
PAL-DK,  
SECAM-DKK1  
OIRT  
VHF: R1 to R12  
UHF: 21 to 69  
CATV: 44 MHz to 470 MHz  
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD,  
CD-R/CD-RW (CD-DA, Video CD, MP3, JPEG, DivX)  
Internal HDD capacity  
[EH57] 160 GB  
[EH67] 250 GB  
PAL-I  
South Africa  
VHF: 4–13  
UHF: 21–69  
Optical pick-up  
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units  
RF converter output:  
Not provided  
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)  
SD Card ([EH67])  
LASER specification  
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)  
Slot:  
SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc  
Compatible media: SD Memory Card§2, SDHC Memory Card§3  
,
Wave length: (CD) 780 nm wave length, (DVD) 662 nm wave length  
Laser power:  
MultiMediaCard  
Format:  
FAT12, FAT16§4  
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection  
(In case of SD Memory Card/MultiMediaCard)  
FAT32§4 (In case of SDHC Memory Card)  
Audio  
Recording system:  
Dolby Digital 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack)  
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz  
More than 10 k≠  
Still picture (JPEG)  
Image file format:  
JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera File system),  
sub sampling; 4:2:2 or 4:2:0  
Number of pixels:  
Thawing time:  
Audio in:  
Input level:  
Input impedance:  
Audio out:  
Output level:  
Output impedance:  
Digital audio out:  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)  
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz  
Less than 1 k≠  
Between 34 a 34 and 6144 a 4096  
Approx. 1.9 sec (6 M pixels, JPEG)  
Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS)  
Video (SD Video)  
Codec:  
MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)  
SD-Video format conforming  
Video  
Video system:  
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]  
File Format:  
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from card  
to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.  
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or  
DVD-RAM disc, the playback is possible.  
SECAM (only input)/PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields  
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields  
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields  
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)  
Others  
Region code:  
Recording system:  
[For]Asia]  
#3  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
[For]Middle]East]  
Operating temperature:  
Operating humidity range:  
Power supply:  
#4  
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East] Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):  
#2  
5 oC to 40 oC  
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.] Video in (PAL/NTSC):  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Power consumption:  
Dimensions (WkDkH):  
Mass:  
AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz  
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz  
Approx. 32 W  
430 mmk330 mmk59 mm  
Approx. 4.2 kg  
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East] S-Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):  
AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.] S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):  
AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
Video out (PAL/NTSC):  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):  
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
RGB out (PAL/NTSC):  
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 , termination  
Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 , termination  
Power consumption in standby mode:  
Approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)  
Approx. 11 W (Quick Start mode)  
[Note]  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
§1 It is compatible to a DVD-Video format after finalised.  
§2 Includes miniSD cards. (A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)  
§3 Class is not supported.  
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 , termination  
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 , termination  
§4 Long file name is unsupported.  
DV input  
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc  
RQT8906  
Useable capacity will be less (SD Card).  
HDMI Output  
This unit supports “HDAVI Control 2” function.  
19 pin type A: 1 pc  
78  
Safety precautions  
Placement  
Foreign matter  
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high  
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These  
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby  
shortening the unit’s service life.  
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric  
shock or malfunction.  
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or  
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the  
power supply and contact your dealer.  
Do not place heavy items on the unit.  
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain  
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.  
Voltage  
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit  
and cause a fire.  
Service  
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when  
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.  
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is  
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other  
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect  
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service  
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is  
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.  
AC mains lead protection  
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not  
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or  
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.  
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC  
mains lead can cause electric shock.  
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power  
source if it is not to be used for a long time.  
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric  
shock.  
Official DivX® Certified product.  
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®6) with standard  
playback of DivX® media files.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of  
DivX, Inc. and are used under license.  
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS  
2.0iDigital Out” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface  
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is  
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.  
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized  
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited  
consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by  
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial  
Co., Ltd.  
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
SDHC Logo is a trademark.  
Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and  
are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.  
RQT8906  
79  
Index  
Edit  
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Adjust the audio quality  
(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Adjust the picture quality  
(Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Album  
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Audio  
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
AV2 settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Enabling discs to be played on other  
equipment—Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Ratings level settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 61  
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26–29  
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 57, 77  
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 56, 77  
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . . . . 23  
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . 59  
G-CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Channel  
HDAVI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–18, 63  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 63, 77  
High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 61  
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 40  
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Cleaning  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Clock settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Connection  
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15  
Amplifier, system component . . . . . . . . 16  
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–17  
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Copy  
SD Card (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Country setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 41  
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 13  
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 25  
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Still picture  
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Subtitle  
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 77  
Language  
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 61  
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 61  
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 77  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc  
(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Menu  
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Mode  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35  
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26–29  
Tuning  
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 66  
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–18, 63  
Name  
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 41  
Delete  
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 43  
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Digital Audio Output settings . . . . 62, 63  
Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . 30, 36, 40, 44  
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6  
Display  
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Picture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 62  
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 39, 77  
Properties  
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Protection  
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33–35, 77  
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.  
p
RQT8906-L  
F0307KJ0  

JVC AV 21VT31 User Manual
JVC AV28T20EP User Manual
JVC GGT0087 001A H User Manual
Kenwood FS620 User Manual
LG Electronics L226WTM User Manual
Marshall electronic Marshall Electronics Computer Monitor M LYNX 10W User Manual
Optiquest VS12107 User Manual
Panasonic Cordless Telephone KX TG6542 User Manual
Philips 23LC120 User Manual
Philips 46PFL5615D User Manual